Home

1397-UM000 - Rockwell Automation

1. B 6 CE Conformity Figure B 2 cont Filter Dimensions la 741 0 22 5 0 86 SPECIFICATION 29 17 WEIGHT 10kg 22 05 Ibs Dl os m 5200 118 BACK MOUNTING 4 M6 1 4 20 SS SS SCREWS DUAL KEYWAY AH EE SS HIS SIDE MOUNTING 4 M8 5 16 18 A EE Bs SCREWS ca 2 SS SS Q HP 250 ALL DIMENSION ARE IN did 3 25 SS C el 8 46 MILLIMETERS INCHES dg ES He M6 STUD SET ol SS Ss To 2 NUT 3 PLAIN NYLON BUSH WASHER EARTH TERMINALS ARE M8 i 785 0 275 0 30 91 10 83 94 U UDDDDUDDUDOODUDODODODODDODDOUDDODODDDNDODODOD at 80 0 mds mm E 0000000 0000000000 000000000000 0000000000 DELL LI i rss 0 71 3 15 L 7410 22 0 29 17 0 87 3DF4357 Filter Dimensions F 818 0 7 f 32 5 1 28 SPECIFICATION 32 20 MM L WEIGHT 23kg 50 71 Ibs IEN 41300 1 18 TERMINALS 35mmx3mm BUS BAR e WITH M12 FASTENER S828 82883358 FILTER MOUNTING 4 M10 7 16 14 ag D SCREWS Base amp Side e ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS INCHES A pe tain 9245 Ss Ss wees 0 96 dha gt ba 20 5 0 81 DL o t KEYHOLE MOUNTING DIMENSIONS la 873 0 420 0 34 37 d 16 54 dE CO poo 0
2. Seege AE on H i 12 7 camere 0 50 5 epe A el En a D y MEAN vn til NE O Y qu P2 ME Y Me id d 67 5 230 0 ae 240 0 gt 2 66 9 06 9 45 m 470 371 1 W n 14 61 g 599 0 a 406 0 gt 23 58 FRONT 23 58 15 99 A SIDE rop 598 4 23 56 578 9 22 79 TOP Mounting Hardware 6x M10 or 3 8 All Dimensions Millimeters and Inches Y Y Approximate Shipping Weight 100 kg 220 5 Ibs Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Figure 2 5 Drive Mounting Dimensions 400 to 600 HP at 460 VAC 26 68 N 677 7mm 2 2 10 20 10 30 53 8mm 259 1mm ee i O E L 81 o 8 se d 45 25 ENTE 1149 2mm 2 mu o S aoo ool oo 43 47 a Tollollo 1104 0mm e fe Es s e e 18 l e 1 1FU 2FU 3FU i 8 1 13 e 8 6 oo e ua de 42 37 ol 281 282 283 1076 3mm Oan ojo D eU o pa d 0 aa li up ME SS M Al 2 12 p Lo 1030 53 8mm 259 1mm 261 6mm 25 61 650
3. Installation 25 e je e tH In e xy dk j b JE LI Kee R eo 9 m 300 0 gt 11 81 334 3 gt 13 16 SIDE Rec Hardware 6 x M8 or 5 16 All Dimensions Millimeters and Inches Approximate Shipping Weight 55 0 kg 122 Ibs Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 6 Installation Figure 2 4 Drive Mounting Dimensions 150 HP at 230 VAC 200 300 HP at 460 VAC gt 67 5 Le 230 0 240 0 gt lt 424 7 gt 2 66 9 06 9 45 16 72 res e o HT q O A 8 S OS a O A i kA o o MO o16 o c e L B o LJ 8 res l MN o o A e 8228 i lo Selh e e 32 39 d H 850 0 o d 2 9 AL 33 46 Allen Bradicy e lee zi E E LI l o le le 4n S P D B LEO O uA e DW e
4. DB Connections for Option Kits DC Motor Field Connection 100 150 HP at 230 VAC 200 300 HP at 460 VAC TOP VIEW Al 2 DBR AZ S1 400 600 HP at 460 VAC t 1 2 3 4 P F OY CXII pg Dag E i ZUN 9 e e e s s O TOP VIEW DC Motor Field Connection Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 14 Start Up and Adjustment Table 4 B Motor Field Connections Drive Terminal Motor Terminal F1 F2 Power On Checks Power Application be performed with power applied to the Drive Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Throughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure DO NOT PROCEED REMOVE POWER by opening the branch circuit disconnect device and correct the malfunction before continuing ATTENTION The following start up procedure must Apply power to the Drive If you are using a HIM programming device the Drive will display the following screen for several seconds during power up Connecting IMPORTANT If the Drive detects a fault a statement relating to the fault will be shown on the display Record this information remove all power and correct the fault source befor
5. DEA moo D e gt DB E unl E md EN Wa Connections Motor O oF SS SS For E Option os Kits Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Installation 2 29 Figure 2 20 DC Motor Field and Armature Connection Locations 400 600 HP at 460 VAC Al S2 DBR A2 S1 e 6 6 REMOVABLE TAS T LINK e l eo joo IA E O o O Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 30 Installation Control Connections Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 The Bulletin 1397 is supplied with the following standard I O compliment e 10 Digital Inputs 24V DC internally or externally supplied 8V DC turn on voltage 0 5 mA turn off current e 3 Contact Outputs 250V AC maximum 30V DC maximum 2A maximum resistive load 1A maximum inductive load e 2 Speed Reference Inputs Analog Reference 1 1
6. 58719 31 Start Up and Adjustment 4 11 Pre Power Verification imperative that the installation instructions in Chapter 2 and the Pre Power checks listed in the previous section be completely accomplished No attempt to apply power should be made if the installation is in question Failure to properly install and configure the Drive or options could result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Prior to energizing the Drive it is Additionally you must verify that all Drive options are properly configured for their intended application These options include but are not limited to OPTION INSTALLATION MANUAL e Enhanced Field Supply 1397 5 24 e Regulated Field Supply 1397 5 17 e 60 HP AC Line Disconnect 1397 5 11 e Dynamic Braking 1397 5 14 e Pulse Encoder Interface 1397 5 13 e Expansion I O 1397 5 19 e AC Tach Interface 1397 5 22 e 460 230V Fuse Kit 1397 5 16 e Blower Motor Starter 1397 5 20 e 150 HP AC Line Disconnect 1397 5 21 e 115VAC Control Int Bd 1397 5 18 e nverting Fault C B Kit 1397 5 29 e AC Line Disconnect Kit 1397 5 30 e AC Line Filter Kit 1397 5 31 Ensure that the Coast Stop input between terminals TB 7 and TB 8 of the Regulator Board is locked in the open state If the Drive is equipped with an optional AC disconnect verify that the disconnect is in the open position Record the m
7. PARAMETER LEVEL SEE CHAPTER 5 FOR SPECIFIC PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS Series B HIM or later only Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Terminal T N Program and Display Modes WM MM MM 1 The Display and Program modes allow access to the parameters for viewing or programming A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be shown B Press the Increment or Decrement key to show Program or Display C Press Enter D Press the Increment or Decrement key until the desired group is displayed E Press Enter F Press the Increment or Decrement key to scroll to the desired parameter Choose Mode Display Choose Mode Program Choose Group Metering Anlg In 1 0 RPM Bit ENUMs SEL Bit ENUMS 16 character text strings will be displayed to aid interpretation of bit parameters G Select a bit parameter with the Increment or Decrement keys H Press the SELect key to view the ENUM of the first bit Pressing this key again will move the cursor to the left one bit A blinking underline cursor will indicate that you are in the Display mode or that a Read Only parameter has been accessed A flashing character will indicate that the value can be changed Individual bits of a Read Write parameter can be changed in the same manner Pressing the SELect key will move the cursor flashing ch
8. Aajpeig uayly av Note Do Not Mount Drive Horizontally on Side or Back 40 150 HP 230VAC 75 600 HP 460VAC 265A 380 415 VAC 76 mm 3 in 51 mm 2 in 101 mm 4 in 305 mm 12 in 305 mm 12 in Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 4 Installation Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Figure 2 2 Drive Mounting Dimensions 1 5 to 30 HP at 230 VAC 7 to 110A 380 415 VAC 3 to 60 HP at 460 VAC lt 136 0 5 35 Ia IE e E M i EIS 5 e R 18 Ei e Allen Bradley 463 0 477 5 18 23 497 5 EB a mr sae p X A EN MUU nn IN Ee DN II A WW wee UU nnn UU H VU UA UU UU ii d Le ANO O O ER aia en e el 158 i EAE F I Gel IHANA Cale 2
9. o o A O BLOWER MOTO STARTER KIT HF Eds Oo C el S R ONLY 4 DANGER E D o 1FU MF 6R O AC Line 181 8e 183 Connection O Jae FRONT VIEW OF DRIVE WITHOUT DISCONNECT Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 22 Installation Figure 2 15 A C Line Connection Locations 100 150 HP at 230 VAC 200 300 HP at 460 VAC O O O eh o V MTA s yn s Ah o shel VN A a c AC Line Connection CS d c n Ord er ze co O9 o o y pel Uus E lo 8 oleo o ol 1 aa T Ag e Allen Bradley 6 m 3 Alb ERA S BO O 6 6 gp og 580 6 m A Oop 55 sl 1 i MACH B P El Bro 5 4 el Bega k E A ui IN zin MEN Me SHOWN WITHOUT AC LINE DISCONNECT Publication 1397 5 0 J
10. Figure 2 21 Regulator Board Terminal Strip Location Weg 0 Ba d I L a ELE hes E E ap CII s 1 cups qm cm I Li OGO E if J28 E s UT d O L J 699969699 9 9 6999999 5999999999 S A j l Jl n jl l J Terminal Strip Regulator Board Input Signal Definitions The 1397 Drive will recognize a change in the state of a digital input e g 0 24VDC if it is applied longer than 20 ms Power 24VDC signals are available on regulator terminal block pins TB 01 TB 07 TB 11 and TB 14 The associated common connection is present on TB 15 The Digital inputs shown Figure 2 18 are defined as follows TB 01 POWER A 24VDC supply is available at this pin TB 02 RUN Edge sensitive signal that initiates a Run command 0 es 1 Run If the Drive is Run voltage may be applied to the armature causing the motor to reach the desired speed The Run input is latched and therefore does not have to be maintained to keep the drive Running This input can be masked through the Run Mask P 201 or Logic Mask P 207 parameters Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 32 Installation TB 03 STOP This is a level sensitive signal that initiates a Stop command 0 Stop 1 Not Stop The stopping mode is determined by the Stop Mode Type P 115 pa
11. is selected the reference is Pos Current Limit Autotune Execution The speed loop and the current loop may be tuned in one step or each loop may be selected and tuned individually To execute Autotune make certain the previously lowered parameters are set to their final value then perform the following steps 1 Set Autotune Type P 052 in the setup memory to the desired tuning mode The available selections are Current Loop or Speed Loop or Current and Spd Note If tuning the Speed Loop separately the Current Loop should have been previously tuned for best results 2 Press START Note Current Loop tunes in approximately 3 to 4 seconds Speed Loop tunes in approximately 1 minute If no faults occur the Drive stops with tuned values in memory In order to save these values the user must perform a memory save in the EEPROM menu so that these values are not lost if power is cycled The Run key is now back to normal operation Save Parameters to EEPROM IMPORTANT Upon competition of the auto tune procedure the parameters must be written to the non volatile EEPROM memory or they will be lost when power is removed from the Drive NOTE For applications requiring precise speed control the speed regulator may require manual tuning to achieve the desired response Manual adjustment of KP and KI velocity loops may be necessary in some applications Consult the factory for assistance if tuning
12. Separated from all other wiring on the panel As close to the ground plane as possible This is especially important if an inverting fault breaker or dynamic braking circuit is part of the armature circuit The external motor wiring must be run in a shielded cable or continuous conductive conduit The motor shunt field and armature leads can be run together in the same cable A ground wire must be run that bonds the motor to the system star ground Refer to Figure B 6 for proper connection of the conduit shield and bonding wire Motor cable length is a major contributor to common mode conducted emissions The 1397 mains filters are sized for up to 75 meters 250 feet of shielded motor power cables total installed length If your installation requires a greater length contact Allen Bradley Wiring the Kits The Bulletin 1397 has a number of option kits The kits listed in Table B D are EMC benign they have no impact on the EMC compliance of the product if properly installed See the appropriate kit Instruction Manuals for installation and wiring information Table B D 1397 EMC Benign Kits Kit Name Model Number 115 VAC Control Interface 1397 LII 460 VAC to 230 VAC Fuse Conversion 1397 FC AC Line Disconnect 1397 DS Blower Motor Starter 1397 MB Enhanced Field Supply 1397 FS3 Field Current Regulator 1397 FS2 Inverting Fault Circuit Breaker 1397 IFB YO Expansion Board Model Number 914FK0101 Wir
13. TOP 10mm DIA GROUND STUD 10mm DIA GROUND STUD With Lug Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Installation 2 13 Figure 2 10 Drive Ground Point Locations 400 600 HP at 460 VAC M10 GROUND STUD Eb Mi GE RS M10 GROUND STUD Ea M I A LI S Ge m in qe 5 S ai L i mi re e cake m d ai Y p IN HINA gt ET TO IVT KD MES ei x HNT F n an e Le H OSA i o 181 182 183 eil Desst d S d o y i J IME TB poc e o o E pe DE L ES wur VEU Ww o o i T a 00 09 oe TOP VIEW o o lo if eo 19 191 10 NENNE
14. P 036 The drive current transformer turns ratio Tp Tn See Regulator board replacement instructions for information on determining the CT TURNS RATIO This parameter is not restored if a Restore Defaults is done The Drive Current Transformer Turns Ratio Tp Tn Display Drive Units Tp Tn Parameter Type Configurable Group Setup Factory Default Value varies per HP rating See table below Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 32767 calculation of the burden resistor value Do not adjust change the value of this parameter from its factory set value unless you are replacing the regulator board see chart below Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION The CT Turns Ratio parameter is also used in the Value to Enter 1 5 HP at 230 V AC 3 HP at 460 VAC 139 2 7 5 HP at 230 V AC 5 15 HP at 460 VAC 208 10 15 HP at 230 VAC 20 30 HP at 460 VAC 417 20 30 HP at 230 VAC 40 60 HP at 460 VAC 833 40 75 HP at 230 VAC 75 150 HP at 460 VAC 2000 100 150 HP at 230 VAC 200 300 HP at 460 5230 VAC 400 600 HP at 460VAC 7770 7 Amps at 380 415 VAC 139 29 Amps at 380 415 VAC 208 55 Amps at 380 415 VAC 417 110 Amps at 380 415 VAC 833 265 Amps at 380 415 VAC 2000 Accel Time P 037 Amount of time it will take the drive to reach Display Drive Units SECONDS Max Motor Speed from 0 speed Smaller Group Setup ar i
15. 297 OCL Neg Limit 100 283 Field Weaken Kp 0 80 298 OCL Ramp Time 10 0 sec 284 Fid Weaken Level 228 299 OCL Reference 0 290 OCL Fdbk Source Cur Lp Fdbk 300 OCL Ref Rounding 0 291 OCL LeadLag Freq 1 0 301 OCL Ref Source Register 292 OCL LeadLag Ratio 10 302 OCL Trim Range 0 0 293 OCL LeadLag Type 1 303 OCL Enable Disabled 294 OCL Kp 2 0 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Appendix E Lifting Instructions Introduction This publication will guide you through the steps needed to properly lift and mount the following Drives on a vertical surface e 1397 DC Drives 60 600 HP ATTENTION To guard against possible personal injury or equipment damage e Do Not allow any part of the Drive or lifting mecha nism to make contact with electrically charged con ductors or components e At no time should a person or their limbs be directly underneath the items being lifted e Do not subject the load to high rates of acceleration or deceleration e Inspect all lifting hardware for proper attachment before lifting Drive unit Lifting Component Ratings All lifting equipment and lifting components Hooks bolts lifts slings chains etc must have a minimum lifting capacity of 1 000 Ib Drive Mounting Perform the following steps to mount the Drive NOTE Horizontal mounting is NOT permitted 1 Check the hole pattern on the panel to which the Drive will be mo
16. Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Programming Parameters 5 81 Adapter 1 0 Data Out C1 P 238 This parameter displays the parameter number whose value will be written into the PLC input data table during PLC operation Data Out C2 P 239 This parameter displays the parameter number whose value will be written into the PLC input data table during PLC operation Data Out D1 P 240 This parameter displays the parameter number whose value will be written into the PLC input data table during PLC operation Data Out D2 P 241 This parameter displays the parameter number whose value will be written into the PLC input data table during PLC operation Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factor
17. ANLG IN 3 3 ANLG IN 4 4 FREQUENCY IN 5 ADAPTER 1 6 ADAPTER 2 7 ADAPTER 3 8 ADAPTER 4 9 ADAPTER 5 10 ADAPTER 6 Feature Select 0 0 10 SECS 10 0 seconds Tunable Feature Select 1 0 0 300 0 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 40 Programming Parameters FEATURE SELECT Monitor 1 Source P 104 Selects the signal that drives monitor 1 Current Loop Feedback Average Cut Lp Fdbk Display Drive Units Parameter Range Numeric Text 0 Cur Lp Fdbk 1 Spd Lp Fdbk 2 Spd Ramp Out 3 Spd Ramp In 4 Spd Src Out Parameter Type Configurable Group Feature Select Factory Default 1 Spd Lp Fdbk Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 From Speed Loop Block Diagram EE NM Spd Ramp Out Monitor 1 From Speed Reference O Output Ramp Block Diagram J Spd Ramp In 2 P13 Sod Sre In COMPARE Start Stop To I O From Speed Reference p i Monitor 1 Level TIMER Expansion Source Block Diagram P105 Outputs Monitor 1 Delay Delay Time Block Diagram P103 Monitor 1 Level P 105 The threshold for level detector 1 Refer to Display Drive Units the Level Detectors block diagram Fig Default Setting 10 0 A 12 for additional information Parameter Type Tunable When the absolute value of the signal driving Group Feature Select monitor 1 is gt this threshold the associated Factory Default 10 0 timer starts If the input signal is lt this edi rau ad threshold the timer
18. Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value RPM Metering 5000 0 5000 0 RPM Metering 5000 0 5000 0 RPM Metering 5000 0 5000 0 RPM Metering 5000 0 5000 0 Programming Parameters 5 21 METERING Speed Pot P 029 Analog reference value scaled to max and min Process Speed measured by the drive after all hardware and software scaling Trim Output P 030 Shows the value of trim that will be added to speed reference Spd Src Output Actual Min Max values will be determined by Motor Arm Volts P 046 or Max Motor Speed P 041 Torque Reference P 031 Shows the value in amps of the currently selected reference to the drive see Fig A 3 Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value RPM Metering 5000 0 5000 0 RPM Metering 5000 0 5000 0 AMPS Metering 0 960 0 960 0 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 22 Programming Parameters SETUP CT Turns Ratio
19. Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Tunable Input Cong 1 000 0 750 2 250 Numeric 0 0 10V el ON 2 4 20mA 3 10 50mA Configurable Input Config 0 0 3 Numeric Tunable Input Config 0 200 200 Numeric Tunable Input Config 1 000 0 750 2 250 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 48 Programming Parameters INPUT CONFIG Anlg In 2 Zero P 131 Removes any hardware introduced offset from the analog reference signal Typically it will be 0 Anlg In 3 Gain P 132 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Scales analog input 3 Terminals 50 amp 51 on the I O Exp Typically 1 000 Anlg In 3 Type P 133 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Selects the type of signal that the drive will expect to be connected to analog input 3 terminals 50 and 51 on the I O Expansion board The value of this parameter must match the setting of jumpers J11 and J12 on the I O Expansion board Refer to the I O Expansion Inputs Fig A 2 block diagram for further information Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter R
20. Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 108 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 116 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 115 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 32 127 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 84 Programming Parameters Process Display Process 1 Text 7 P 255 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 1 Par and Process 1 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of the display Process 1 Text 8 P 256 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 1 Par and Process 1 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of the display Process 2 Par P 257 This parameter should be set to the number of the parameter whose scaled value will be displayed on Line 2 of the HIM Display Panel Process 2 Scale P 258 This value sets the scaling multiplier for Process 2 Par Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Mi
21. P 194 when the motor is rotated in the same direction as it was in Step 6 of the Motor and Feedback Polarity checks 3 The value in Anlg Tach Fdbk P 194 should be positive 4 If the value observed is negative remove power from the Drive and reverse the tachometer connections terminated at the Drive DC tachometers are terminated at terminals 21 and 23 high voltage range or 22 and 23 low voltage range of the regulator terminal strip Figure 4 15 is set incorrectly or the tach is wired incorrectly Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the drive or process equipment ATTENTION The Drive can overspeed if jumper J14 Figure 4 15 DC Tach Installation 21 2 u naucE 22 LO RANGE 23 e Common Regulator Board Terminal Strip High Voltage DC Tach Terminations 5 Proceed to verification of Drive Calibration Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 34 Start Up and Adjustment Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Pulse Encoder Polarity Checks Regenerative Drives Only ATTENTION Prior to running polarity checks you must provide a hardwired maintained external operator accessible coast stop pushbutton at regulator board terminals 7 and 8 to disable the machine in case of improper operation Uncontrolled machine operation can result if this is not done Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Verify that Feedback Type P 039
22. P 010 Motor field current feedback signal after scaling and gain Used by the field current regulator and field loss detection circuit Frequency In P 011 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Gain adjustment for analog input 1 terminals 50 and 51 on the I O Expansion board The digital value of the frequency input terminals 39 40 and 41 on the I O Expansion board Freq In is scaled between Freq In Zero and Freq In Scale Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value AMPS Metering 1440 1440 96 Metering Read Only Output 0 0 10 100 0 AMPS Metering 0 0 20 0 kHz Metering 0 2000 2000 Freq In is zero when the frequency at the input is less than or equal to Freq In Zero It is 4095 when the frequency equals Freq In Scale Frequency Input A terminal 39 F D A terminal 40 COM terminal 41 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 FREQ IN FREQ IN ZERO SCALE SOFTWARE SCALING Bas p To any switch selection za labeled FREQUENCY INPUT Programming Parameters 5 17 METERING Jog Ramp Output P 012 An out
23. P 299 The reference value for the outer control loop Displayed in OCL user units Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value OCL REF ROUNDING output of OCL enable logic OCL REF RAMP TIME Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value SEC Tunable Process Pl 0 0 sec 10 0 sec 300 0 sec To Outer Control Loop Block Diagram To Outer Control Loop Block Diagram CNTS Tunable Process Pl 4095 0 4095 Programming Parameters 5 95 Process Pl OCL Ref Rounding P 300 Specifies the amount of reference smoothing rounding for the outer control loop It is set as a percentage of the OCL Ramp Time Rounding is performed at the beginning and end of an OCL reference change Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value 0 to 50 0 Tunable Process Pl 0 0 50 If OCL Ref Rounding is set to 0 the OCL performs a linear ramp function If set to 50 the entire ramp time is smoothed 50 at the beginning of the reference change and 50 at the end If OCL Ref Ramp Time is 0 0 ramp block bypassed this parameter has no affect on the OCL reference signal Refer to the OCL Ramp Time block diagram for additional information Reference Rounding 0 Roundin
24. Shows current reference owner Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read Only Owners 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read Only Owners 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 Programming Parameters 5 77 Fit Reset Owner P 219 This parameter displays which parameter is currently resetting a fault MOP Owner P 220 This parameter displays which adapters are currently issuing increases or decreases in MOP Command Frequency Local Owner P 221 This parameter displays which adapter has requested exclusive control of all drive logic functions If an adapter is in local lockout all other functions except stop on all other adapters are locked out and non functional Local control can only be obtained when the drive is not running Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Val
25. The default is on when e The drive has a non regenerative S6 power unit e Feedback Type is set to AC Tach e Feedback Type is set to Encoder and Encoder Quad is Off Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value SECS Tunable Feature Select 1 00 seconds 0 05 seconds 65 20 seconds Numeric Text Configurable Feature Select 0 Off 0 OFF 1 ON If Encoder Quadrature is set to Off and Pulse Tach is the selected Feedback Type type Neg Current Lim will be set to 0 and Reverse Disable set to On preventing reverse direction Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 43 FEATURE SELECT S Curve Rounding P 111 Rate of change positive or negative of acceleration and deceleration to smooth the Speed Loop Ramp output For example if equal to 20 then 40 of the acceleration and deceleration time will be spent smoothing and the remainder will be a linear ramp 0 linear ramp no rounding 50 smoothing for the entire ramp In regard to Trim Mode Type S Curve Rounding will interfere with the Accel Time and the Decel Time so that the draw will not be constant Therefore it is recommended that S Curve Rounding be set to 0 if Trim Mode Type is set to Proportional Incremental trim is not affected by this limita
26. turned OFF during a Ramp Stop Command This is to prevent a Current Limit stop from occuring during a Ramp Stop command Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Firmware Block Diagrams Figure A 5 Outer Control Loop OCL Ref OCL Pos Rounding Limit P 300 P 296 OCL Kp OCL Trim REGISTER OCL Reference Q une OCL Ramp P 294 face P 299 Output ANLG IN 3 P 301 OCL bond TP la a 4 Output rom S VO Exp AMEN SCURVE i Inputs Block OCL enable d Diagram FREQUENCY IN from below Sen Wer A From SCANport ADAPTOR 1 6 DEC CC Neg Freq Limit P 295 P 297 2 Ramp Time P 298 D OCL Fdbk Reg REGISTER o ge CML FEEDBACK OCL Fdbk Type CML FEEDBACK Source P 293 8 sample average ANLG IN 3 tries S WLO Pen RATIO LAGLEAD c Diagram FREQUENCY IN elo ADAPTOR 1 6 OCL OCL From SCANport Lead Lag Lead Lag Freq OCL Ratio IP 293 enable P 292 from below Outer Control Loop enable logic OCL Enable TP Drive P 016 Status REGISTER P 191 OCL Enable TP OCL ENABLE LOGIC Running P 016 OCL Enable TERMBLK 1 OCL enable CTB 64 to above NOTES 1 gt The _oct__ enable signal must be ON in order for the Outer Control Loop to execute When ol enable is OFF the S curve Lead Lag and PI blocks are held in reset causing the initial value INITV to be copied to each block s output 2 The OCL referen
27. A 5 for additional information OCL Neg Limit P 297 The negative limit of the outer control loop PI block The output of the OCL PI block is never below this limit Refer to the Outer Control Loop block diagram Fig A 5 for additional information Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value OCL PI OCL PI PROP POSITIVE GAIN LIMIT output of OCL enable logic OCL PI OCLPI LEAD NEGATIVE FREQ LIMIT Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value RD S 0 00 to 141 37 rad sec Tunable Process Pl 0 00 1 00 rad sec 141 37 rad sec OCL TRIM RANGE OCL OUTPUT To Speed gt Reference Mode Select Block Diagram 96 of Max Motor Speed Tunable Process Pl 0 00 100 100 of Max Motor Speed Tunable Process Pl 0 00 100 100 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 94 Programming Parameters OCL Ramp Time P 298 The ramp time for the outer control loop reference Sets the minimum amount of time for the OCL S curve output to change from 0 to full scale and vice versa If set to 0 0 the ramp block is bypassed Note If the ramp block is bypassed rapid speed change can result OCL REFERENCE To Outer Control Loop Block Diagram OCL Reference
28. Buffers Optionally enabled using DIP switches on the module Logic Status p 190 Spd Loop Fdbk p 022 Data Out A1 p 234 Data Out A2 p 235 Data Out B1 p 236 Data Out B2 p 237 Data Out C1 p 238 Data Out C2 p 239 Data Out D1 p 240 Data Out D2 p 241 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Using SCANport Capabilities D 9 Serial Communications Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for the programmable controller relates to the 1397 Drive when a Serial Communications Module is used SCANport 1203 Gx2 1397 Drive DF1 DH485 to SCANport N40 0 63 BTW Emulation N41 0 Logic Command N41 19 Reference DF1 DH485 M 2 Datalink Al Serial Messages So Darinka Write N41 4 Datalink B1 N41 50 Datalink B2 N41 69 Datalink C1 N41 7 Datalink C2 N41 89 Datalink D1 N41 90 Datalink D2 Logic Command Data In A1 p 226 Data In A2 p 227 Data In B1 p 228 Data In B2 p 229 Data In C1 p 230 Data In C2 p 231 Data In D1 p 232 Data In D2 p 233 N40 0 63 BTR Emulation N41 0 Logic Status N41 1 Feedback N41 29 Datalink A1 DF1 DH485 N41 39 Datalink A2 Serial Messages N41 0 Datalink B1 Read N41 5 Datalink B2 N41 69 Datalink C1 N41 7 Datalink C2 N41 80 Datalink D1 N41 99 Datalink D2 Logic Status p 190 Spd Loop Fabk p 022 Data Out A1 p 234 Data Out A2 p 235 Data Out B1 p 236 Data Out B2 p 237 Data Out C1 p 238 Data Out C2 p 23
29. E Stud Located behind Swing out panel 4 6999999699 Customer supplied terminal strip mounted in close proximity to Drive to keep shield length to a minimum Tach cable in steel conduit Grounded wiring Class 8 Twisted Pair GROUND STUD BUS DC Tach DC Encoder E Motor IMPORTANT For CE requirements refer to Appendix B DS Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 10 Installation Figure 2 7 Drive Ground Point Locations 1 5 30 HP at 230 VAC 7 100 A O 380 415 VAC 3 60 HP at 460 VAC POWER GROUND POINTS TOP VIEW el tel lel lel M6 with Lug ll M A e e ele IN e e e elle e elelelele CONTROL GROUND POINTS on bottom E left side of drive M5 with Lug lL i Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Installation 2 11 Figure 2 8 Drive Ground Point Locations 40 75 HP at 230 VAC 265A 380 415 VAC 75 150 HP at 460 VAC 265 Amp Rated Output o o ip o e 0 Ole GRD ji o BLOWER MOTOR POWER GROUND POINT 9 M8 o O o o Y S FU STARTER KI t
30. KP KI loops becomes necessary Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 38 Start Up and Adjustment Application Set Up Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 There are several parameters associated with the use of the 1397 Drive for specific applications At this point the basic Drive control has been tuned for simple speed control If it is desired to operate the Drive using one of the optional functions refer to Chapter 5 for a description of the parameters associated with these functions In addition to set up of the Drive parameters associated with these functions it is also necessary to verify correct configuration of the Source to Sink Parameters for the external control device being used to control the Drive for the specific application Refer to the appropriate adapter board instruction manual for a description of how to use the adapter board and how to interface the adapter board to the Drive when various Drive functions are desired Introduction Record Keeping Chapter 5 Programming Parameters This chapter contains the information required to assist the user in programming the Drive for a specific application after initial start up Drives are shipped programmed with default values and are preconfigured for the factory installed options The Drive parameters are divided into the following categories Diagnostics These parameters provide information on various test status and alarm inputs Masks These parameters
31. Minimum Value Maximum Value kHz Configurable Input Config 2 0 kHz 2 0 kHz 250 0 kHz Programming Parameters 5 51 OUTPUT CONFIG Anlg Out 1 Gain P 144 Scales the Analog Output Signal at the regulator board terminal strip Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Tunable Output Config 1 00 0 100 1 900 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 52 Programming Parameters OUTPUT CONFIG Anlg Out 1 Src P 145 Selects the drive testpoint that will source Display Drive Units Numeric Text meter output 1 terminals 24 and 25 on the Parameter Range 0 Cur Lp Fdbk 11 Arm Volt regulator board 1 Cur Loop Ref 12 ATach Fdbk 2 Cur Loop Err 13 Encoder Fdbk 3 Spd Loop Fdbk 14 Zero 4 Spd Lp Ref 15 Full Scale 5 Spd Lp Error 16 Power Output 6 Spd Lp Out 17 OCL Ref 7 Spd Ramp Out 18 OCL Ramp Out 8 Spd Ramp In 19 OCL Feedback 9 Spd Src Out 20 OCL Output 10 Trim Output 21 Field Ref 22 Field Fdbk Note See Table A below for Full Scale Values Default Setting 0 Cur Lp Fdbk Minimum Value 0 Cur Lp Fdbk Maximum Value 22 Field Fdbk Parameter Type Tunable Group Output Output Config Table A Source Signal Values Signal Selected Full Scale Value Cur Loop Fdbk P 006 Motor Arm Amps P 45 x Maximum Current P 40 Cur Loop Ref P 008 100 FULL SCALE VALUE Cur Loop Error P
32. Numeric Text Read amp Write Process Display 0 5 308 Numeric Text Read amp Write Process Display 32768 1 00 32767 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 86 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 111 127 Programming Parameters 5 83 Process Display Process 1 Text 3 P 251 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 1 Par and Process 1 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of the display Process 1 Text 4 P 252 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 1 Par and Process 1 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of the display Process 1 Text 5 P 253 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 1 Par and Process 1 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of the display Process 1 Text 6 P 254 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 1 Par and Process 1 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of the display Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group
33. Polarity Checks Jumper here for non wear indicator Start Up and Adjustment 4 29 NOTE If the DC motor used for this application doesn t possess a brush wear indicator verify that terminals 12 and 14 of the regulator board terminal strip are jumpered Figure 4 12 Figure 4 12 Brush Wear Option BRUSH WEAR MOTOR THERMOSTAT 24V Regulator Board Terminal Strip 24VDC Brush Wear Circuit Other Standard Inputs Other I O may or may not be wired to the Drive depending on the application The Drive may be operated through the Human Interface Module HIM without connecting the remaining I O Other inputs may be verified as described in the preceding steps NOTE If the Drive will be operated using a SCANport device such as the Bulletin 1203 GD1 GK1 1203 GD2 GK2 1203 GK5 1203 FB1 amp FM1 or 1203 SMI additional set up is required See the chapter entitled Programming Parameters and the installation manual of the specific SCANport device must provide a hard wired maintained external operator accessible coast stop pushbutton at regulator board terminals 7 and 8 to disable the machine in case of improper operation Uncontrolled machine operation can result if this is not done Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION Prior to running polarity checks you Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 30 Start Up and Adjustment incorrect sudden and rapid acce
34. Preset Speed Select A n 3 CTB 62 MOP Decrement EXP 1 0 Dig In n 4 CTB 63 MOP Increment P 195 To function n 5 CTB 64 OCL Enable E specified by 24VDC at CTB 14 regulator board and CTB 61 I O Expansion board MOP Reset Enable P 086 MOP Increment CTB 63 INC RST MOP Output MOP Decrement CTB 62 DEC MOP P 015 MAX PROCESS SPEED MAX MIN PROCESS SPEED MIN ACCEL DECEL MOP MOP Accel Decel Time Time P 084 P 085 Anlg Anlg Anlg ANALOG INPUTS IN3 Type IN3 Zero IN3 Gain P 133 P 134 P 132 Anlg In 3 Analog Input 3 4 CTB 50 SOFTWARE CTB 51 SCALING Anlg IN 3 Type 32768 Anlg INA Anlg IN4 Zero Gain P 138 P 137 Anlg In 4 Analog Input 4 P 004 CTB 52 SOFTWARE CTB 53 SCALING FREQUENCY INPUT Freq In Freq In Zero Scale P 135 P 138 Frequency In SOFTWARE SCALING P 011 Frequency Input A CTB 39 96 oA 96 CTB 40 Common CTB 41 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 digital input n To any switch selection labeled MOP OUTPUT To any switch selection labeled ANLG IN 3 To Any Switch Selection Labeled ANLG IN 4 To Any Switch Selection Labeled FREQUENCY IN Firmware Block Diagrams A 3 Figure A 3 Speed Trim Reference Select Anlg In 1 P 001 c Ref1 Source P 090 From Standard Inputs Block Speed Pot P 029 O Ge Diagram MOP Output P 015 _A O Q Anlg
35. SPD SRC OUT TRIM OUTPUT From Speed Loop ARM VOLT Block Diagram ATACH FDBK ENCODER FDBK ZERO 0 4095 FULL SCALE From Engineering Units Output POWER OUTPUT Block Diagram OCL REF OCL RAMP OUT From Outer Control Loop Block Diagram OCL FEEDBACK OCL OUTPUT FIELD REF From Field Control Loop Block Diagram FIELD FDBK Firmware Block Diagrams A 13 Figure A 13 UO Expansion Outputs DIG OUT n DIG OUT n SRC Normal Open TYPE Digital Outputs n 1 CTB 66 CTB 67 n 2 CTB 68 CTB 69 Normal Closed O O ANG OUT 3 TYPE ANG OUT 3 GAIN ANG OUT 3 SRC SOFTWARE SCALING Analog Output 3 CTB 54 CTB 55 ANG OUT 4 GAIN ANG OUT 4 SRC SOFTWARE SCALING Analog Output 4 CTB 56 CTB 57 FREQ OUT ZERO FREQ OUT SCALE FREQ OUT Source Frequency Output A CTB 42 A CTB 43 Common CTB 44 SOFTWARE SCALING Default Selection Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 A 14 Firmware Block Diagrams This Page Intentionally Blank Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 EMC Compliance EMC Requirements Equipment Requirements Appendix B CE Conformity This appendix provides information on installing 1397 Drives for compliance with European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Standards It covers e Requirements for standards compliance e Guidelines on installing the AC mains filter and inductor e Instructions on how the Drive must be installed wired and grounde
36. The customer interlock input is a permissive required to operate the Drive It allows the Drive to be interlocked with the driven equipment for personnel or equipment safety purposes If the Drive is stopped it is prevented from running until this input is CLOSED If the interlock input OPENS when the Drive is running the AC contactor will be forced open and the motor will coast to a stop NOTE If the application does not require a customer interlock verify the terminals 11 and 9 of the regulator board terminal strip are jumpered and proceed to Step 5 Verify that the Customer interlock is operating properly by repeating Step 2 measuring the voltage present between terminals 11 and 9 of the regulator board terminal strip The voltage across the stop input should be OV DC with the Customer Interlock input CLOSED permissive OK and 24V DC with the stop input OPEN permissive lost Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 28 Start Up and Adjustment Motor Thermostat Input If your DC Motor is equipped with a thermostat verify that it is correctly wired Remove power from the Drive and verify that no voltage exists between either motor thermostat input terminal and ground by measuring between both terminal 13 and 14 and the Drive chassis If voltage exists verify motor thermostat wiring at the motor NOTE Ifthe DC motor used for this application doesn t possess a motor thermostat verify that terminals 13 and 14 of the reg
37. is set to Pulse Tach for pulse tachometer encoder Verify that the pulse encoder is properly terminated by monitoring Encoder Fdbk P 189 when the motor is rotated in the same direction as it was in Step 6 of the Motor and Feedback Polarity checks The value in Encoder Fdbk P 189 should be positive magnitude is unimportant If the value observed is negative remove power from the Drive and reverse the pulse encoder connections terminated at the pulse encoder interface board This interface board is located behind the regulator board inside the regulator carrier Reverse the polarity of only one channel i e B and B NOT located at terminals 75 and 76 of the pulse encoder interface board Proceed to Verification of Drive Calibration Autotuning Start Up and Adjustment 4 35 The 1397 utilizes digital speed regulator and a digital current regulator to control the DC motor These regulators or loops may be automatically tuned by setting the appropriate tuning parameter and running the Drive when coupled to the machine load auto tuning Stay clear of rotating machinery to avoid contact with rotating parts Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury ATTENTION The motor will rotate during verified that no overhauling or hanging loads are on the motor Auto tuning will not operate properly if this type of load exists Failure to observe this precaution could result i
38. 0 4 Monitor 1 Output P13 COMPARE Start Stop To 1 0 Expansion THER Outputs Block Diagram Delay Time P103 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 42 Programming Parameters FEATURE SELECT Monitor 2 Level P 108 The threshold for monitor 2 Refer to the Level Detectors block diagram Fig A 12 for additional information Display Drive Units Default Setting Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 10 0 Tunable Feature Select 10 0 0 1 100 0 The parameter range for the level detector is automatically rescaled for speed or current based on the input selected by Monitor 2 Source If Cur Loop Fdbck is selected for Monitor 2 Source the parameter range is 0 1 to Maximum Current For any other Monitor 2 Source settings the parameter range is 0 1 to 100 0 Normal Inertia P 109 The time required to accelerate the motor and load inertia from zero to motor base speed at Motor Arm Amps and Motor Field Amps This parameter is set by the speed loop self tuning procedure or is entered by the operator directly Reverse Disable P 110 Note Reverse Disable applies only to regenerative drives When On Reverse Disable prevents the speed reference from dropping below zero The reverse bridge cannot be activated and the drive cannot reverse When Off the speed reference can drop below zero and the drive can reverse
39. 1 Hidden FUTURE USE Masks 210 MASKS 2 Hidden FUTURE USE Masks 211 MASKS 3 Hidden FUTURE USE Masks 212 MASKS 4 Hidden FUTURE USE Masks 213 MASKS 5 Hidden FUTURE USE Masks 214 Stop Owner Enum 0 127 0 Read Only Owners 215 Start Owner Enum 0 127 0 Read Only Owners 216 Direction Owner Enum 0 127 0 Read Only Owners 217 Jog Owner Enum 0 127 0 Read Only Owners 218 Reference Owner Enum 0 127 0 Read Only Owners 219 Fit Reset Owner Enum 0 127 0 Read Only Owners 220 MOP Owner Enum 0 127 0 Read Only Owners 221 Local Owner Enum 0 127 0 Read Only Owners 222 OWNERS 2 Hidden FUTURE USE Owners 223 OWNERS 3 Hidden FUTURE USE Owners 224 OWNERS 4 Hidden FUTURE USE Owners 225 Not Used Owners 226 DATA IN A1 Param 0 308 0 Read 4 Write Adapter I O 227 DATA IN A2 Param 0 308 0 Read 4 Write Adapter I O 228 DATA IN B1 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 229 DATA IN B2 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 230 DATA IN C1 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 231 DATA IN C2 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 232 DATA IN D1 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 233 DATA IN D2 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 234 DATA OUT A1 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 12 Programming Parameters PARM NAME UNITS MIN MAX DEFAULT TYPE FUNCTION 235 DATA OUT A2 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 236 DATA OUT B1 Param 0 308 0 Read 8 Write Adapter I O 23
40. 10 of Maximum Speed an alarm is generated Max Process Spd Setup Group P 042 500 RPM ATTENTION When performing this adjustment do not allow the motor to exceed the maximum safe speed of the driven equipment as determined by the equipment manufacturer Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury A The maximum speed of the Drive that can be supported by the application or process Max Process Speed can be less than or equal to Max Motor Speed If raising this value causes Min Process Spd to become less than 10 of Max Process Spd an alarm is generated Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Start Up and Adjustment 4 19 Min Process Spd P 043 250 RPM Setup Group ATTENTION This Drive can operate at and maintain zero speed when this parameter is set to zero A The user is responsible for assuring safe conditions for operating personnel by providing suitable guards audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that the Drive is operating at or near zero speed Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Nominal AC Freq P 050 60 Hz Typically the value of this parameter is 50 or 60 Hz Use the up down Setup Group arrow keys to adjust the value to the nominal value of the line frquency in use Valid values are 48 to 62 Hz Nominal AC Volts P 051 230 VAC Use the up down arrow keys to
41. 146 Anlg Out 1 Zero pg 5 53 147 Anlg Out 2 Gain pg 5 53 148 Anlg Out 2 Src pg 5 54 149 Anlg Out 2 Zero pg 5 55 150 Anlg Out 3 Gain pg 5 55 151 Anlg Out 3 Src pg 5 56 152 Anlg Out 3 Type pg 5 57 153 Anlg Out 4 Gain pg 5 57 154 Anlg Out 4 Src pg 5 58 155 Dig Out 1 Src pg 5 59 156 Dig Out 1 Type pg 5 59 157 Dig Out 2 Src pg 5 60 158 Dig Out 2 Type pg 5 60 159 Freq Out Scale pg 5 60 160 Freq Out Source pg 5 61 161 Freq Out Zero pg 5 62 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 DIAGNOSTICS 167 Open SCR Sens pg 5 63 168 Open SCR Trip Pt pg 5 63 169 Ph Tst Delta pg 5 63 170 Ph Tst Bridge pg 5 63 171 Armature Bridge pg 5 64 172 Armature Delta pg 5 64 173 Cur Compound TP pg 5 64 174 Field Delta pg 5 64 175 Field Econ Active pg 5 65 176 Field Ref TP pg 5 65 177 Field Regulator pg 5 65 178 Expansion I O pg 5 65 179 IR Comp TP pg 5 66 180 J11 Tach V Scale pg 5 66 181 J14 Tach V Range pg 5 66 182 J15 Reg Type pg 5 66 183 J18 Arm Fdbk Res pg 5 67 184 J20 Fld Loss Det pg 5 67 185 J21 Field Supply pg 5 67 186 Power Unit Type pg 5 68 187 Encoder Kit pg 5 68 188 Regulator SW Ver pg 5 68 189 Encoder Fdbk pg 5 68 190 Logic Status pg 5 69 191 Drive Status pg 5 69 192 AC Line Period pg 5 70 193 AC Line Voltage pg 5 70 194 Anlg Tach Fdbk pg 5 70 195 Exp I O Dig In pg 5 70 196 Fault Reset pg 5 71 197 Alarm Re
42. 2 Text 3 pg 5 85 262 Process 2 Text 4 pg 5 85 263 Process 2 Text 5 pg 5 86 p SS 2 2 gt 264 Process 2 Text 6 pg 5 86 265 Process 2 Text 7 pg 5 86 266 Process 2 Text 8 pg 5 86 Programming Parameters 5 5 272 E Fld Volts Adj pg 5 87 273 Fld Econ Delay pg 5 87 274 Fld Econ Ref pg 5 87 275 Fld Auto Weak pg 5 88 276 Fld Delta Hi Lim pg 5 88 277 Fld Loss Level pg 5 89 278 Fld Lp Lead Freq pg 5 89 279 Fld Loop Kp pg 5 89 280 Field Reference pg 5 90 281 Fld Loop K Fdbk pg 5 90 282 Fld Weak Ld Freq pg 5 90 283 Fld Weaken Kp pg 5 90 284 Fld Weaken Level pg 5 90 Process Pl 290 OCL Fdbk Source pg 5 91 291 OCL LeadLag Freq pg 5 91 292 OCL LeadLag Rato pg 5 92 293 OCL LeadLag Type pg 5 92 294 OCL Kp pg 5 92 295 OCL Lead Freq pg 5 93 296 OCL Pos Limit pg 5 93 297 OCL Neg Limit pg 5 93 298 OCL Ramp Time pg 5 94 299 OCL Reference pg 5 94 300 OCL Ref Rounding pg 5 95 301 OCL Ref Source pg 5 95 302 OCL Trim Range pg 5 96 303 OCL Enable pg 5 96 304 OCL Fdbk Reg pg 5 96 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 6 Programming Parameters Numeric Parameter Table Table 5 A 1397 Parameters PARM NAME UNITS MIN MAX DEFAULT TYPE FUNCTION 1 Anlg In 1 RPM 5369 5369 0 Metering 2 Anlg In 2 RPM 5369 5369 0 Metering 3 Anlg In 3 Counts 5369 5369 0 Metering 4 Anlg In 4 Counts 5369 536
43. 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text Low High Diagnostics Read Only 0 1920 1920 Numeric Text 0 Low 1 High Diagnostics Read Only 0 0 1 ATTENTION The drive will not operate at the correct speed if this jumper is not set to the correct position Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Spd Voltage 1 Curr Torque Diagnostics Read Only 0 0 1 Numeric Text 0 J18 Error 1 Position 1 2 Position 2 3 Position 3 4 Position 4 Diagnostics 0 0 4 Programming Parameters 5 67 DIAGNOSTICS J20 Fld Loss Det P 184 Indicates the position of hardware jumper Field Loss Detect which enables or disables field current loss detection This jumper is only read on powerup This jumper is not used if a field current regulator is installed 421 Field Supply P 185 Indicates the position of hardware jumper Field Supply Jumper which must be set according to the jumper of the Enhanced Field Supply positions A C or B C
44. 3 SCANport I O Image D 5 SCANport Messages D 11 Selecting an AC Line Filter B 2 Selecting an AC Line Inductor B 3 Serial Communications Module D 9 Space Heaters C 2 Specifications 1 4 Status Display 3 5 Start Up and Adjustment 4 1 System Power Ground B 8 T Terminal Strip Inputs 2 32 Termination of Shielded Cables B 9 Troubleshooting 6 1 U User Parameter Values D 13 Index I 3 W Wire Size Type amp Class 2 15 Wiring Clearance 2 14 Wiring Customer Interlocks 2 36 Wiring the AC Line Filter B 11 Wiring the AC Line Inductor B 12 Wiring the Analog Input Circuits 2 39 Wiring the Coast Stop Circuit 2 34 Wiring the Control I O Circuits 2 38 Wiring the Fault Alarm Reset Circuit 2 37 Wiring the Motor B 12 Wiring the Motor Thermostat Brush Wear Circuits 2 36 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 LA Index This Page Intentionally Blank Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publicati
45. 300 5 0 Tunable Setup 38 Decel Time Seconds 0 1 300 5 0 Tunable Setup Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 7 PARM NAME UNITS MIN MAX DEFAULT TYPE FUNCTION 39 Feedback Type Selection 0 Arm Volt 3 AC Tach 0 Arm Volt Configurable Setup 40 Maximum Current FLA 25 200 150 Tunable Setup 41 Max Motor Speed RPM 5 5000 500 Configurable Setup 42 Max Process Speed RPM 1 User Defined 500 Tunable Setup 43 Min Process Speed RPM 0 User Defined 250 Tunable Setup 44 Motor Field Amps AMPS 0 11 ISR 0 01 Configurable Setup 45 Motor Arm Amps AMPS 0 1 3000 8 Configurable Setup 46 Motor Arm Volts VOLTS 160 675 240 Configurable Setup 47 Anlg Tach V 100 Volts per RPM 18 0v 200 v 18 0v Configurable Setup 48 Encoder PPR PPR 18 2500 18 Configurable Setup 49 Encoder Quad Selection 1 On 0 Off 1 On Configurable Setup 50 Nominal AC Freq Hz 48Hz 62 HZ 50or60Hz Configurable Adv Setup 51 Nominal AC Volts VAC 200V 575V 230VAC Configurable Adv Setup 52 Auto Tune Type 0 3 0 Configurable Setup 53 SETUP 2 Hidden FUTURE USE Setup 54 SETUP 3 Hidden FUTURE USE Setup 55 SETUP 4 Hidden FUTURE USE Setup 56 SETUP 5 Hidden FUTURE USE Setup 57 Anlg Tach Gain 0 750 1 250 1 000 Tunable Adv Setup 58 Anlg Tach Zero 200 200 0 Tunable Adv Setup 59 Arm Voltage Gain 0 750 1 250 1 000 Tunable Adv Setup 60 Arm Voltage Zero 200 200 0 Tunable Adv Setup 61 Cur Loop K Fdbk 1 000 1 100 1 000 Tunable Adv Setup 62 Cur Lp Lead Freq rad sec 10 500 100 Tun
46. 330 0 30 0 ke 12 99 1 18 L SPECIFICATION l A Y 20 0 0 79 WEIGHT 2 7 Kg 5 95 Ibs E gt T BACK MOUNTING 4 M5 il 410 24 SCREWS a TI SIDE MOUNTING 2 M8 E 5 16 18 SCREWS gt ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN w 4 SE MILLIMETERS INCHES da a 155 0 6 10 1 al 3 F of St L 6 0 0 24 390 9 0 0 35 i 195 0 15 35 7 68 o o o o DIU AE Li ETS I 32 5 1 28 V 330 0 12 99 30 0 albo 3DF4353 and 3DF4354 Filter Dimensions B 818 0 1 32 5 1 28 SPECIFICATION 32 20 MM L WEIGHT 23kg 50 71 Ibs b 4 30 0 1 18 TERMINALS 35mmx3mm BUS BAR WITH M12 FASTENER 323323 8888S FILTER MOUNTING 4 M10 7 16 14 aig pd SCREWS Base amp Side E ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS INCHES JA Di 02 224 5 2 47 0 96 dk pi 20 5 0 81 c e KEYHOLE MOUNTING DIMENSIONS lo 873 0 e 420 0 34 37 16 54 CO mmm 0000000000000000 000000000000000 0000 7 620 00 de de de 2 44 d co 0000000 0000000000000000 000000000000000 00000 o aos L ff Sa e 3DF4355 Filter Dimensions Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001
47. 5 0 June 2001 5 74 Programming Parameters Logic Mask P 207 This parameter determines which adapters can control the drive If the bit for an adapter is set to 0 the adapter will have no control functions except for stop In addition the adapter can be removed from the drive while power is applied without causing a serial fault Local Mask P 208 This parameter controls which adapters are allowed to take exclusive control of drive logic commands except stop Exclusive Local Control can only be taken while the drive is stopped Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Tunable Masks or through Control Logic 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 0000000001111111 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read amp Write Masks 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 0000000001111111 Programming Parameters 5 75 Stop Owner P 214 This parameter displays which adapters are presently issuing a valid stop command
48. 55 bin 6 2 Nm 55 bin 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 bin 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 40 Nm 350 Ib in 40 Nm 350 Ib in uL TL mL mL 2 o ZAR ARA 380 VAC 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 415 VAC 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 222 460 VAC 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 13 6 Nm 120 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 22 Nm 200 Ib in 34 Nm 300 Ib in LL AS 34 Nm 300 Ib in 34 Nm 300 Ib in 34 Nm 300 Ib in 34 Nm 300 Ib in Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Note The tigh
49. 5mm Installation 2 7 18 82 478 1mm Ea 18 30 464 7mm Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 8 Installation Grounding Procedures Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 The purpose of grounding is to e Limit dangerous voltages to ground potential on exposed parts in the event of an electrical fault e To facilitate proper operation of overcurrent device when ground fault conditions are incurred e To provide suppression of electrical interference The general grounding concept for the 1397 is shown in Figure 2 6 and explained below Specific Drive ground point locations are detailed in Figures 2 7 2 8 and 2 9 Safety Ground Is the safety ground required by code The ground bus can be connected to adjacent building steel girder joist or a floor ground grid provided grounding points comply with NEC regulations Multiple connections are permitted but Do Not ground at the same point as a Signal Ground The minimum distance between Signal and Safety Ground is 10 feet 3 meters The ground bus is limited to a maximum of 1 ohm resistance to ground Power Feeder Each power feeder from the substation transformer to the Drive must be provided with properly sized ground cables Simply utilizing the conduit or cab
50. 67 Encoder PPR 048 5 26 421 Field Supply 185 5 67 Encoder Quad 049 5 27 Drive Status 191 5 69 Expansion I O 178 5 65 AC Line Period 192 5 69 Exp 1 O Dig In 195 5 70 Last Stop Cause 166 5 62 Fault Reset 196 5 70 Local Mask 208 5 74 Fault Reset Mask 205 5 73 Local Owner 221 5 77 Fit Reset Owner 219 5 77 Logic Mask 207 5 74 Feedback Type 039 5 23 Logic Status 190 5 69 Field Delta 174 5 64 Monitor 1 Delay 103 5 39 Field Feedback 010 5 16 Monitor 1 Level 105 5 40 Field Ref TP 176 5 65 Motor Field Amps 044 5 25 Fld Auto Weak 275 5 88 Monitor 1 Source 104 5 40 Fld Econ Active 175 5 64 Monitor 2 Delay 106 5 41 Field Regulator 177 5 65 Monitor 2 Level 108 5 42 Fld Delta Hi Lim 276 5 88 Maximum Current 040 5 23 Fld Econ Delay 273 5 87 Max Motor Speed 041 5 23 Fld Econ Ref 274 5 87 Max Process Spd 042 5 24 Fld Lp Lead Freq 278 5 89 Min Process Speed 043 5 24 Fld Loop K Fdbk 281 5 90 Min Speed Bypass 099 5 38 Fld Loop Kp 279 5 89 Monitor 1 Output 013 5 17 Fld Loss Level 277 5 89 Monitor 2 Output 014 5 17 Field Reference 280 5 90 Motor Field Amps 044 5 25 Fld Weak Ld Freq 282 5 90 MOP Accel Time 084 5 34 Fld Weaken Kp 283 5 90 MOP Decel Time 085 5 34 Fld Weaken Level 284 5 90 MOP Mask 206 5 73 Frequency In 011 5 16 MOP Output 015 5 17 Frequency In Scale 137 5 49 MOP Reset Enable 086 5 34 Freq In Zero 138 5 50 MOP Owner 220 5 77 Freq Out Src 160 5 61 Motor Arm Amps 045 5 25 Freq Out Scale 159 5 60 Motor Arm Volts 046 5 26 Freq
51. ATTENTION Failure to correctly set speed voltage parameters could result in dangerously high motor speeds Failure to provide overspeed protection could result in bodily injury or equipment damage Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 22 Start Up and Adjustment Figure 4 9 Regulator Board Jumpers J10 Setting Field Loss Detection Jumper J20 The Field Loss Detect jumper J20 determines whether or not a fault is generated when a field loss occurs IMPORTANT Jumper J20 is ignored if the Field Current Regulator kit is installed Therefore placing J20 in the Disable position will not disable field loss detection See the instructions supplied with the kit for more information on the Field Current Regulator NOTE Jumper J20 has no effect if the drive is equipped with an enhanced or regulated field supply Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Start Up and Adjustment 4 23 current loss detection and inhibit Drive operation via one of the Drive interlocks when Jumper J20 is positioned to disable Misapplication of this jumper can cause the motor to run at dangerously high speeds Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION The user must provide external field To detect complete loss of field current place the jumper on pins 1 and 2 Enable When a complete loss is sensed a fault is generated and the Drive is coast stopped To ignore field loss place the jump
52. BD Allen Bradley 1397 DC Drive 1 5 150HP 230VAC 7 265ADC 380 415VAC 3 600HP 460VAC Firmware Rev 2 xx User Manual Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Allen Bradley Sales Office or online at http www ab com manuals gi describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will the Allen Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation the Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Allen Bradley Company with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual
53. Change Direction Key Active Only on Regen Drives with Reverse Disable set to off and Encoder Quad to ON Pressing this key will cause the motor to change direction The appropriate Direction Indicator will light to indicate direction Direction LEDs Indicators These LEDs will illuminate to indicate the direction of motor rotation Direction Mask P 202 and Logic Mask P 207 must be set to allow HIM control of direction change If both of these LED s are lit the one that is steadily lit indicates the commanded direction while the flashing LED indicates the actual direction NOTE All Run Jog and Direction keys can also be affected by the Logic Mask P 207 It may be necessary to set or disable parameter 207 when configuring keys Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 3 4 Programming Terminal Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Up Down Arrows only available with digital speed control Pressing these keys will increase or decrease the HIM reference command An indication of this command will be shown on the visual Speed Indicator The Drive will use this reference if the HIM is the selected reference source Pressing both keys simultaneously stores the current HIM reference command in HIM memory Cycling power or removing the HIM from the Drive will set the reference command to the value stored in HIM memory If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been ordered the Up Down keys and Speed Indicator will
54. Check motor e Armature inductance too high tune current loop armature inductance and windings manually Repair or replace as necessary 048 ST Max Current A maximum current condition with minimum rotation exists Check the process equipment for possibly due to possible overloads caused by bad e Inability of the motor to rotate freely due to mechanical bearings slipping belts outside friction interference etc Uncouple motor from e Motor load is too high load and check that it rotates freely e Motor field is not at normal operating temperature when unloaded 049 ST Inertia Fault Attached inertia is out of range possibly due to e Maximum Auto Tune speed reached Check the process equipment for a e Overhauling load present possible overhauling load condition e High mechanical friction present Check process equipment for e The Speed Loop cannot be auto tuned Tune Speed overload or mechanical binding Loop manually condition 050 ST Stability Fit Speed instability exists possibly due to Check tachometer leads for damage e Current Loop not properly tuned prior to the Speed Loop incorrect connection or improper e Tachometer feedback connected incorrectly conduit routing of leads 051 ST Stab lt 50 Fault Auto Tune Stablty is too low due to e Specified stability is less than that calculated by current loop tuning Use 50 or greater 052 ST Stab lt 75 Fault Auto Tune Stabilty is too low possibly due to e Specified sta
55. Degrees 0 0 RD S 0 0 01 Amps 0 900 RD S 0 0 01 Volt 0 Hidden FUTURE Hidden FUTURE Hidden FUTURE Hidden FUTURE Hidden FUTURE Selection 0 rad sec 0 01 Numeric 2 Selection 0 0 10 RD S 0 0 0 sec 0 CNTS 4095 96 0 Selection 0 0 Enum 0 Hidden FUTURE Hidden FUTURE Hidden FUTURE Hidden FUTURE Hidden FUTURE MAX USE USE Programming Parameters 5 13 DEFAULT 70 1 130 60 10 0 30 0 00 1 000 0 30 0 80 228 100 o jojojo TYPE Tunable Tunable Configurable Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable Configurable FUNCTION Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Process PI Process PI Process PI Process Pl Process Pl Process Pl Process Pl Process PI Process Pl Process Pl Process Pl Process Pl Process PI Process PI Process PI Process PI Process PI Process PI Process PI Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 14 Programming Parameters Parameter Descriptions By Parameter Group This section provides a list of 1397 parameters sorted into their respective parameter groups with their associated default values Display Drive units description and group designation and any applicable enums Tunable Parameter can be changed while the drive is runn
56. Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Tunable Diagnostics 0 0 1 with no or low field voltage which can result in high motor speed ATTENTION Disabling field loss detection can allow the motor to run Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 B C 1 A C Diagnostics 0 0 1 This jumper only applies to the Enhanced Field Supply and does not effect the operation of the standard or current regulator field supplies This jumper is only read on power up This parameter is not available if a Field Regulator Supply Kit is installed Power Unit Type P 186 Indicates if the drives employs an S6R regenerative or an S6 non regenerative power unit If the power unit type is S6 non regenerative Neg Current Lim will be automatically fixed to 0 and Reverse Disable fixed to On preventing reverse direction Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 S6R Regen 1 S6 Non Rgn Diagnostics Read Only 0 0 1 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 68 Programming Parameters DIAGNOSTICS Encoder Kit P 187 Indicates the presence of an
57. In 3 P 003 Ref 2 Source P 091 From I O 9 Expansion Inputs Anlg In 4 P 004 O Block Diagram Freq In P 011 C C SCANport Set Select Note Set via Bits 14 13 12 of O Reference Command SCANport Logic Control From SCANport Adapter 1 6 O ADAPTER 1 6 O O Preset 1 P 087 PRESET 1 Reference Mask Forward Reverse PRESET SPEED 1 O O Command Preset 2 P 088 PRESET2 er gt PRESET SPEED 2 C Q Y gt O To CML Reference Preset 3 P 089 PRESET 3 Q Block Diagram PRESET SPEED 3 O O O Torque dae Eu O Reference To Speed Reference Ramp eee inputs will as Spd Src Block Diagram From Standard Arig I 1 4P 001 Q Ref 1 Source P 090 sume ownership unt Output Inputs Block Speed Pot P 029 Reference Mask Bit 0 is set to 0 Diagram O O m REF SPEED TB 06 MOP Output P 015 O 1 O 00 Preset Speed From I O Expansioi Anig In 3 P 003 CH Peta Source P C91 O C Select AB Inputs Block Anlg In 4 P 004 0 IOX TB 59 60 Diagram 9 Freq In P 011 O O Adapter 1 6 If the I O Expansion board is not From SCANport Q installed this input is fixed at 00 Preset 1 P 087 01 PRESETSPEED rese O PRESET 1 01 Preset 2 P 088 PRESET 2 10 PRESET SPEED2 DS oe e Q PRESET SPEED 3 Preset 3 P 089 O PRESET3 11 O Trim Reference From Standard Inputs Block Dia gram REGISTER Anlg In 1 P 001 Anlg In 2 P 002 Anlg In 3 P 003 Max Motor Speed P 041 Trim Range P 118 Trim Ref
58. OUT 1 e ANALOG OUT Common e ANALOG OUT 2 EU e RUNNING e le ALARM A m pa FAULT Hem General HIM Description Chapter 3 Programming Terminal Chapter 3 describes the various controls and indicators found on the optional Human Interface Module HIM The material presented in this chapter must be understood to perform the start up procedure in Chapter 4 When the Drive mounted HIM is supplied it will be accessible from the front of the Drive as shown in Figure 3 1 The HIM has two main functions e To provide a means of programming the Drive and viewing operating parameters e To allow different Drive functions to be controlled The HIM is divided into two sections Display amp Programming Panel and Control Panel The Display Panel provides a means of programming the Drive and viewing the various operating parameters The Control Panel allows you to control different drive functions IMPORTANT The operation of some HIM functions will depend upon parameter settings Figure 3 1 Human Interface Module Sections EI Display Panel SISATE J Control Panel Bog Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 3 2 Programming Terminal Figure 3 2 HIM Front Panel Key Descriptions Descriptions of the keys used with the 1397 Drive are presented in the following paragraphs ESC Escape When pressed the ESCape key will cause the programming system to go back one level
59. Open SCR Sens 275 5 88 Spd Loop Kp 078 5 33 Open SCR Trip Pt 128 5 47 Spd Loop Output 024 5 19 Phase Tst Bridge 276 5 88 Spd Loop Ref 025 5 20 Pos Current Lim 067 5 30 Spd Lp Lead Freq 077 5 33 Pos Curr Lim Src 069 5 31 Spd Ramp In TP 027 5 20 Power Unit Type 186 5 67 Spd Ramp Output 028 5 20 Preset Speed 1 2 and 3 87 88 and 89 5 35 Spd Src Out 026 5 20 PLL Max Error 071 5 32 Speed Pot 029 5 21 Process 1 Par 247 5 82 Stop Owner 214 5 75 Process 1 Scale 248 5 82 Stop Mode Type 115 5 44 Process 1 Text 1 249 5 82 Stop Speed Level 116 5 44 Process 1 Text 2 250 5 82 Tach Loss Angle 079 5 33 Process 1 Text 3 251 5 83 Torque Reference 031 5 21 Process 1 Text 4 252 5 83 Trim Mode Type 117 5 45 Process 1 Text 5 253 5 83 Trim Range 118 5 45 Process 1 Text 6 254 5 83 Trim Reference 120 5 46 Process 1 Text 7 255 5 84 Trim Ref Source 119 5 45 Process 1 Text 8 256 5 84 Trim Output 030 5 21 Process 2 Par 257 5 84 Process 2 Scale 258 5 84 Process 2 Text 1 259 5 85 Process 2 Text 2 260 5 85 Process 2 Text 3 261 5 85 Process 2 Text 4 262 5 85 Process 2 Text 5 263 5 86 Process 2 Text 6 264 5 86 Process 2 Text 7 265 5 86 Process 2 Text 8 266 5 86 Ref Ramp Bypass 100 5 38 Reference Mask 204 5 73 Ref 1 Source 090 5 35 Ref 2 Source 091 5 36 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 100 Programming Parameters Hidden Parameters The parameters shown in the following table are unused and are hidden in 1397 Drive
60. Out Zero 161 5 62 Neg Current Lim 068 5 30 IR Compensation 066 5 30 Neg Cur Lim Src 070 5 31 Inertia Comp Src 102 5 39 Normal Inertia 109 5 42 Inertia Comp Reg 122 5 46 Nominal AC Freq 050 5 27 IR Comp TP 179 5 65 Nominal AC Volt 051 5 27 Jog Acc Dec Time 092 5 36 NOT Ready Cause 199 5 71 Jog Mask 203 5 72 OCL Enable TP 016 5 18 Jog Owner 217 5 76 OCL Enable Src 121 5 46 Jog Ramp Output 012 5 17 OCL Feedback 017 5 18 Jog Reference 093 5 36 OCL Fdbk Reg 304 5 96 Jog Off Dly Time 094 5 37 OCL Fdbk Source 290 5 91 J11 Tach V Scale 180 5 66 OCL Kp 294 5 92 J14 Tach V Range 181 5 66 OCL LeadLag Ratio 292 5 92 J15 Reg Type 182 5 66 OCL LeadLag Type 293 5 92 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 99 Name Name No Seebage Name No SeePage Page Name No See Page OCL LeadLag Freq 291 5 91 Reference Owner 218 5 76 OCL Output 018 5 18 Regulator SW Ver 188 5 68 OCL Lead Freq 295 5 93 Reverse Disable 110 5 42 OCL Neg Limit 297 5 93 Run Mask 201 5 72 OCL Pos Limit 296 5 93 Run Owner 215 5 75 OCL Enable 303 5 96 S Curve Rounding 111 5 43 OCL Ramp Output 019 5 18 Scanport Errors 200 5 71 OCL Ramp Time 298 5 94 Spd Loop Error 021 5 19 OCL Reference TP 020 5 18 Spd Lp Lag Type 076 5 33 OCL Reference 299 5 94 Spd LeadLag Type 074 5 33 OCL Ref Rounding 300 5 95 Spd Lp Lag Freq 075 5 33 OCL Ref Source 301 5 95 Spd Loop Fdbk 022 5 19 OCL Trim Range 302 5 96 Spd Loop Lag Out 023 5 19
61. Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of the Allen Bradley Company is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is especially important for successful application and understanding of the product Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to h alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Summary of Changes Summary of Changes Description of New or Updated Information Page Type FS2 FS3 Control Options 1 4 Updated 200 Overload Capacity 1 4 Updated Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Introduction Installation Table of Contents Chapter 1 Manual Objectives ooooooooococorcrrrs 1 1 Chapter Objective 1 2 Storage Conditions EENS EIERE E arar 1 2 Drive Identification Nameplate 1 2 Firmware Version 2 occenceateteves Fetes ednaque creer 1 2 Catalog Numbering Convention 1 3 A at EE 1 4 Power Ratings and Supply Capacity 230 460VAC 1 6 Power Ratings and Supply Capacity 380 415VAC 1 6 Drive I O Specifications Logic Inputs 1 7 Logic OUIDUIS 1 25549 98 Th
62. Reverse Disable 0 Off 159 Freq Out Scale 250 kHz 111 S Curve Rounding 0 160 Freq Out Src 14 Zero 112 AutoTune Bridge 0 Forward 161 Freq Out Zero 2 kHz 166 Last Stop Cause 0 113 AutoTune Fld Rng 1 00 167 Open SCR Sens 114 AutoTune Stab 25 168 Open SCR Trip Pt 800 115 Stop Mode Type 2 Coast DB 169 Phase Tst Delta 0 degrees 116 Stop Speed Level 50 170 Phase Tst Bridge 0 Forward 117 Trim Mode Type 0 No Trim 171 Armature Bridge 0 Forward Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Using SCANport Capabilities D 15 214 Stop Owner 266 PROCESS 2 TEXT 8 32 No Name Default Value No Name Default Value 172 Armature Delta 0 226 DATA IN A1 0 173 Current Compound TP 0 227 DATA IN A2 0 174 Field Delta 0 228 DATA IN B1 0 175 Field Econ Active 0 Not Active 229 DATA IN B2 0 176 Field Ref TP 0 230 DATA IN C1 0 178 Future Use 0 231 DATAINC2 0 179 IR Comp TP 0 232 DATAINDI 0 180 J11 Tach V Scale 0 288 DATAIN D2 0 181 J14 Tach V Range 0 234 DATA OUT A1 0 182 J15 Reg Type 0 235 DATA OUT A2 0 183 J18 Arm Fdbk Res 0 236 DATA OUT B1 0 184 J20 Fld Loss Det 0 237 DATA OUT B2 0 185 J21 Field Supply 0 238 DATA OUT C1 0 186 Power Unit Type 0 239 DATA OUT C2 0 187 Encoder Kit 0 240 DATA OUT D1 0 188 Regulator SW Ver 0 241 DATA OUT D2 0 189 Encoder Fdbk 0 247 PROCESS 1 PAR 5 190 Logic Status 0 248 PROCES
63. SETUP 5 0 127 Anig In 1 Gain 1 000 84 MOP Accel Time 5 0 128 Anlg In 1 Type 0 O 10V 85 MOP Decel Time 5 0 129 Anig In 1 Zero 0 86 MOP Reset Enable 0 130 Anlg In 2 Gain 1 000 87 Preset Speed 1 250 131 Anlg In 2 Zero 0 88 Preset Speed 2 250 132 Anlg In 3 Gain 1 000 89 Preset Speed 3 250 133 Anlg In 3 Type 1 10V 90 Ref 1 Source 0 134 Anlg In 3 Zero 0 91 Ref2 Source 1 135 Anlg In 4 Gain 1 00 92 Jog Acc Dec Time 3 136 Anlg In 4 Zero 0 93 Jog Reference 250 137 Freg In Scale 250 kHz 94 Jog Off Dly Time 1 138 Freg In Zero 2 0 kHz 95 REF SETUP2 0 144 Anlg Out 1 Gain 1 00 96 REF SETUP 3 0 145 Anlg Out 1 Src 0 Cur Lp Fdbk 97 REF SETUP 4 0 146 Anlg Out 1 Zero 0 98 REF SETUP 5 0 147 Anlg Out 2 Gain 1 000 99 Min Speed Bypass 0 Off 148 Anlg Out 2 Src 0 Spd Lp Fdbk 100 Ref Ramp Bypass 0 149 Anlg Out 2 Zero 0 101 Current Compound 0 150 Anlg Out 3 Gain 1 00 102 Inertia Comp Src 0 151 Anlg Out 3 Src 0 Cur Lp Fdbk 103 Monitor 1 Delay 10 seconds 152 Anlg Out 3 Type 0 0 10V 104 Monitor 1 Source 1 153 Anlg Out 4 Gain 1 000 105 Monitor 1 Level 1096 154 Anlg Out 4 Src 0 Cur Lp Fsdk 106 Monitor 2 Delay 10 seconds 155 Dig Out 1 Src 0 Monitor 1 Out 107 Monitor 2 Source 1 156 Dig Out 1 Type 0 Normal Open 108 Monitor 2 Level 10 157 Dig Out 2 Src 1 Monitor 2 Out 109 Normal Inertia 1 seconds 158 Dig Out 2 Type 0 Normal Open 110
64. Shielded Cable SS Strip Outer Layer of Shield SS ing as shown Figure B 6 Termination of Shielded Cables using a Termination Bracket Braided Strap Connecting to Star Ground Ground Mounting Grounded Copper Bar O Strip Outer Layer of S Termination Shield as shown N Bracket Electrical P i Cabinet AN ege Shielded Cable When using a conduit termination fitting to terminate the shield or rigid conduit the area around the entry hold must be free of paint and protected from corrosion Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 B 10 CE Conformity Main Electrical Cabinet Wiring the Equipment Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 System ground must be extended to all connected enclosures and components by running a ground conductor with the power and signal conductors to these enclosures and components as shown in Figure B 7 Follow the electrical cabinet guidelines described in this Appendix for all remote electrical enclosures Figure B 7 Ground System and Conduit Screen Termination Terminate ground wire to ground at bDothends Electrical Components such as Remote Operator F Stations and Motor Shielded Cable or Conductive Conduit Terminate the Screen to 7 ground at both ends The minimum cross sectional area of a copper ground conductor shall be per EN60204 1 Safety of Machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements section 5 2 Table 1 The ground conductor m
65. Size Read the number of fault entries allowed in the fault fault queue Trip Fault Read Request which fault queue entry caused the drive to trip Fault Queue Entry Read Full Read the contents of the specified fault queue entry Warning Command Write Clear faults and clear the warning queue Warning Queue Size Read the number of fault entries allowed in the warning queue Warning Queue Entry Read Full Read the contents of the specified warning queue entry Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 D 12 Using SCANport Capabilities LOGIC STATUS FORMAT Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 BitO Reference Local i Enabled D Adapter ID Running Reference Command Direction Device 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 Reverse Ref 1 0000 Tem o 0 0 1 Forward Preset 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Actual Direction Preset 2 00 1 0 2 0 1 0 0 Reverse Preset 3 Dn 4d 1 3 0 1 1 Y 1 Forward Not Used 0 1 0 0 4 1 0 0 Y Accelerating Not Used 0 1 0 1 5 1 0 1 y Deceleratin Not Used 01 1 0 6 1 10 n 9 Not Used 0 1 1 1 Multipoint 1 1 Y arm Ref 2 10 00 Ts SC Adapteri 1 0 0 1 t Spee Adapter 2 1 9 7 0 Adapter 3 1 0 1 1 Adapter 4 i11 0 9
66. Source P 119 Draw Percent Out P 009 To Speed From I O Expansion Reference Ramp Inputs Block Anig In 4 P004 Block Diagram Diagram Frequency In P 011 ADAPTER 1 6 From SCANport Max Motor Speed P 041 1 3 When configured as a Current Regulator J15 Current the CML uses TORQUE REFERENCE as an input bypassing the Speed Loop 2 3 When configured as a Speed Regulator J15 Speed the CML uses SPD SOURCE SELECT OUT to generate the CML input Default Selection Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 A 4 Firmware Block Diagrams Figure A 4 Speed Reference Ramp SPD Src Output Forward Reverse LIMIT P 026 MAX Command RAMP STOP From Speed COMMAND Reference SY EN O OFF O Source Select Le ON O Block Diagram Q Trim Mode MIN Type E P 117 Min Process Reverse INCREMENTAL Speed Min Speed Disable O A043 Gees P110 NO TRIM P 099 0 Trim Mode Decel Time Type Weer P 038 NOTRM C P17 INCREMENTAL Draw Percent Out O oe P 009 DECEL TIME PROPORTIONAL y eference errereen Source Select 1 DRAW PERCENT Block Diagram Trim Mode Accel Time NO TRIM Type P 037 Q P 117 INCREMENTAL O O ACCEL TIME PROPORTIONAL 1 DRAW PERCENT S Curve Rounding P 111 SMOOTHING 1 Ref Ramp Bypass P 100 SCURVE Q To O A6 Spd Ramp Output P 028 To Spd Ramp IN TP AB NOTE 1 REF RAMP BYPASS will be automatically P 027
67. Start Owner P 215 This parameter displays which adapters are presently issuing a valid run command Direction Owner P 216 This parameter displays which adapter currently has exclusive control of direction changes Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read Only Owners 00000000000000000 00000000000000000 0000000001111111 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read Only Owners 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read Only Owners 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 76 Programming Parameters Jog Owner P 217 This parameter displays which adapters are presently issuing a valid jog command Reference Owner P 218
68. The SCANport device number is determined by the SCANport connection it is plugged into Masking Control Functions Control functions can be masked This allows you to enable or disable a control function for all or some of the devices IMPORTANT The Stop command CANNOT be masked Any device attached to the 1397 Drive can stop the Drive at any time To set a mask for a control function you can use the parameters detailed in the following table File Program Display To set a mask to control Check this Group Masks this function Parameter Logic Mask Control which ports can accept the control functions 207 Direction Mask Issue forward reverse commands 202 Run Mask Issue a Run command 201 Jog Mask Issue a Jog command 203 Reference Mask Select an alternate reference or preset speed 204 Fit Reset Mask Generate a clear fault command 205 MOP Mask Which adapters can issue MOP commands 206 Local Mask Which adapters can take exclusive local control 208 For each of these parameters each bit represents a device This bit for low Represents 0 Terminal Block SCANport device 1 SCANport device 2 SCANport device 3 SCANport device 4 SCANport device 5 SCANport device 6 o o Ae oa Pp NOTE Bit 7 is not used in this application NOTE The SCANport device number is determined by the SCANport connection it is plugged into If a bit is clear 0 for a mask
69. This parameter must be equal to the rated armature amps found on the motor nameplate Overcurrent or excess heating of the motor could result Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 26 Programming Parameters SETUP Motor Arm Volts P 046 The rated armature voltage from the motor nameplate Anlg Tach V 1000 P 047 The analog tachometer scaling from the tachometer nameplate in volts per 1000 RPM Units are volts DC for DC tachometers or volts AC RMS for AC tachometers Note The use of an AC tachometer requires the AC Tachometer Feedback kit Encoder PPR P 048 Encoder pulses per revolution PPR from the encoder nameplate Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Configurable Setup 240 160 675 overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause an who understands the significance of setting it set the value of this parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to Observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value VAK Configurable Setup 18 0 1000 RPM 18 0 200 0 Note The high limit might be
70. Tunable Input Config 135 Anlg In 4 Gain 0 750 2 250 Zero Tunable Input Config 136 Anlg In 4 Zero 200 200 250 Tunable Input Config 137 Freq In Scale kHz 2 0 250 Configurable Input Config 138 Freq In Zero kHz 2 0 250 Configurable Input Config 139 IN CFG 1 Hidden FUTURE USE Input Config 140 IN CFG 2 Hidden FUTURE USE Input Config 141 IN CFG 3 Hidden FUTURE USE Input Config 142 IN CFG 4 Hidden FUTURE USE Input Config 143 IN CFG 5 Hidden FUTURE USE Input Config 144 Anlg Out 1 Gain 0 100 1 900 1 000 Tunable Output Config 145 Anlg Out 1 Src Selection 0 22 0 Tunable Output Config 146 Anlg Out 1 Zero 200 200 0 Tunable Output Config 147 Anlg Out 2 Gain 0 100 1 900 1 000 Tunable Output Config 148 Anlg Out 2 Src Selection 0 22 3 Tunable Output Config 149 Anlg Out 2 Zero 200 200 0 Tunable Output Config 150 Anlg Out 3 Gain VDC 0 500 1 300 1 0 Tunable Output Config 151 Anlg Out 3 Src Selection 0 22 0 Configurable Output Config 152 Anlg Out 3 Type Selection 0 0 10V 3 10 50mA 1 10V Configurable Output Config 153 Anlg Out 4 Gain VDC 0 500 1 300 1 000 Tunable Output Config 154 Anlg Out 4 Src Enum 0 22 0 Configurable Output Config 155 Dig Out 1 Src Enum 0 3 0 Configurable Output Config 156 Dig Out 1 Type Selection 0 Open 1 Closed 0 Open Configurable Output Config Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 10 Programming Parameters PARM NAME UNITS MIN MAX DEFAULT TYPE FUNCTION 157 Dig Out 2 Src Enum 0 3 1 Configurable Output Config
71. WM WM 1 This mode allows you to search through the parameter list and display all parameters that are not at the factory default values A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be shown B Press the Increment or Decrement key until Search is displayed C Press Enter The HIM will search through all parameters and display any parameters that are not at their factory default values D Press the Increment or Decrement key to scroll through the list Choose Mode Display Choose Mode Search Control Status Mode 1 This mode allows the Drive logic mask to be disabled thus preventing a Serial Fault when the HIM is removed with Drive power applied A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be shown B Press the Increment or Decrement key until Control Status is displayed Press Enter C Select Control Logic using the Increment Decrement keys Press Enter D Press the SELect key then use the Increment or Decrement key to select Disabled or Enable E Press Enter The logic mask is now disabled or enabled Choose Mode Display Choose Mode Control Status Control Status Control Logic Control Logic Disabled Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Terminal 3 13 Control Status Mode continuea 2 This menu provides a means to view the Fault Queue Clear Faults fault q
72. active A ATTENTION The Run Stop and customer interlock circuitry in this Drive is composed of solid state components A hardwired Coast to Stop circuit must be used with this Drive For 115VAC control this circuitry may be added on the optional 115VAC Control Board Installation 2 35 alternative stopping method DO NOT use a hardwired Stop device that removes AC line power This will de energize the shunt field causing a loss of the DB effect and the motor will coast to a stop Hazards to personnel may exist 1f the machine is allowed to coast to a stop ATTENTION If Dynamic Braking is used as an 24V DC INPUT If 24VDC COAST TO STOP is desired the contacts of the ECOAST device must be wired to terminals 7 and 8 of the regulator board terminal strip as shown in Figure 2 23 Figure 2 23 Regulator Board Terminal Strip 24VDC Inputs COAST STOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GEES oooooooooooooooe damage the regulator board Make certain that only 24VDC is being applied to the Regulator board terminal strip If 115VAC inputs are desired an optional 115VAC Control Option Board is required ATTENTION Applying improper input voltage could 115V AC INPUT If you are using 115VAC inputs for control a 115 VAC Control Option Board must be installed and wired to your regulator board If the 115VAC Control Board is not installed on your 1397 follow the instructions provided with the 115V
73. be replaced by the pot Speed Indicator Illuminates in steps to give an approximate visual indication of the commanded speed If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been ordered the Up Down keys and Speed Indicator will be replaced by the pot HIM Operation Programming Terminal 3 5 When power is first applied to the Drive the HIM will cycle through a series of displays These displays will show Drive name HIM ID number and communication status Upon completion the Status Display will be shown Figure 3 3 Status Display This display shows the current status of the Drive i e Ready Running etc or any faults that may be present The Status Display can be replaced by the Process Display or Password Login menu See appropriate sections on the following pages for more information From this display pressing any key will cause Choose Mode to be displayed Pressing the Increment or Decrement keys will allow different modes to be selected as described on the pages that follow Display When selected the Display mode allows any of the parameters to be viewed However parameter modifications are not allowed Program Program mode provides access to the complete listing of parameters available for programming Process The Process mode displays two user selected parameters with text and scaling programmed by the user Search Available on Series B HIM only This mode will search for parameters t
74. being stopped It is typically greater than zero If it is less than 10 of Max Process Spd an alarm is generated NOTE This alarm will only occur after a speed change not on power up Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units RPM Group Setup Parameter Type Tunable Factory Default 500 RPM Minimum Value 1 RPM Maximum Value Max Motor Speed A A ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause an overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person who understands the significance of setting it Set the value of this parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury ATTENTION When performing this adjustment do not allow the motor to exceed the maximum safe speed of the driven equipment as determined by the equipment manufacturer Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Display Drive Units RPM Parameter Type Tunable Group Setup Factory Defaul 250 RPM Minimum Value 0 RPM Maximum Value Max Process Speed A ATTENTION This drive can operate at and maintain zero speed when this parameter is set to zero The user is responsible for assuring safe conditions for operating personnel by providing suitable guards audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that the drive is operating at or near zero speed Failure to observe this precaution could result
75. brush wear detector is not supplied Other possible causes include e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged motor brush wear indicator wiring e Brush wear indicator has malfunctioned 002 AC Line Volt Low The AC line voltage has fallen below 90 of the figure established in Nominal AC Line Voltage Possible causes include e Low AC line voltage e An incorrect value has been entered for Nominal AC Volts P 051 e Blown AC line fuse s 003 AC Line Vit High The AC line voltage rose 115 above the figure established in Nominal AC Volts P 051 Possible causes include e High AC line voltage e Incorrect value entered for Nominal AC Volts P 051 020 Fld Loss Det Dis Field Loss detection has been disabled through a jumper on the regulator board J20 NOTE Option used only when no field exists 030 Contcr Not Open The main FN contactor did not open following a stop If a dynamic braking DB kit is used the DB AUX contact is wired in series with the FN AUX contact Possible causes include e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged FN FN AUX DB or DB AUX wiring e FN FN AUX DB or DB AUX contactor failure e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged main contactor or dynamic brake control wiring MCR or DBCR 031 Contcr Not Closed The main FN contactor did not close following a run or jog command If a dynamic braking DB kit is used the DB AUX contact is wired in series with the FN AUX contact Possible
76. causes include e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged FN FN AUX DB or DB AUX wiring e FN FN AUX DB or DB AUX contactor failure e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged main contactor or dynamic brake control wiring MCR or DBCR 032 Sustained Speed Motor speed did not fall below the value set in Stop Speed Level P 116 in the required period of time during a stop automatically set to 2x the Decel Time P 038 setting Possible causes include e Decel Time not set properly e Stop Speed Level P 116 not set properly e Incorrect speed voltage feedback scaling 033 Sustained Arm I Armature current was unable to reach discontinuous conduction while stopping the Drive Possible causes include e Motor CEMF too high or line voltage too low for proper commutation 034 Aux Contact Open M Contactor Auxiliary contact opened unexpectedly check contactor for proper operation Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 6 8 Alarm No Troubleshooting Alarm Name Description 050 CML Fdbk Scaling Armature current feedback could not be scaled properly based on the values entered for Motor Arm Amps P 045 and Maximum Current P 040 Verify that CT Turns Ratio P 036 has been set to the value shown in the user manual that corresponds to your drive type 051 Low Min Speed The Min Process Spd P 043 value is less than 10 of the Max Process Spd P 042 value This alarm will n
77. contain binary masks for all control functions The masks control which adapters can issue control commands Owners These parameters contain binary information to display which group of adapters is issuing control command Adapter I O Input and Output parameters for the optional communication adapter board used with the 1397 Process Display These parameters provide input to the Human Interface Module programming device Field These parameters allow you to alter Field Supply levels delays current references gain etc Process PI Status amp Reference parameters for the Outer Control Loop Metering These parameters allow you to monitor various reference sources such as Analog Inputs Speed Loops Current Loops Ramp Input and Outputs etc Setup These parameters define basic operation and require configuration during the Start Up procedure Advanced Setup These parameters require configuration during Start Up when selected options are used or with advanced and complex applications Reference Set These parameters allow you to select options such as Accel Decel times Preset speeds Jog times etc Feature Select This parameter group contains the necessary parameters to activate and program advanced features of the Drive Input Configuration These parameters accept analog information from sources outside the Drive Output Configuration These parameters provide analog amp digital output i
78. dissipation capacity Table C A 1397 Three Phase DC Drive Heat Dissipation Watts Loss AMP 460V Rating 380 415 403 7 395 409 29 464 424 55 615 432 110 769 523 520 265 1458 547 521 581 626 659 699 995 1138 1232 1375 BEEN 1922 o 2245 2479 4400 O 4900 550 Table C B High Ambient Temperature Derating Factors Ambient Temperature Correction Factor 40 C 104 F Cabinet heat capacity x 1 45 C 113 F Cabinet heat capacity x 602 50 C 122 F Cabinet heat capacity x 253 55 C 131 F Use separate ventilation Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 c 2 Derating Derating for High Altitude Air Conditioning Space Heaters Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Altitude is also a factor in enclosure heat dissipation capability AII heat dissipation capacities in Table C A are based on an altitude of 3300 feet 1000 meter or less At higher altitudes air density fan efficiency and heat transfer efficiency are all decreased Derate the heat dissipation capacity of the enclosure by 3 for each additional 1000 feet above 3300 feet An alternative to heat dissipation through radiation and conduction in totally enclosed cabinets is to cool the cabinet air through air conditioning Since air conditioners are rated in terms of BTU HR controller watts loss must be converted to BTU HR This is done by multiplying watts loss by 3 413 Use this value to select an appropriately sized air conditioner I
79. encoder kit Regulator SW Ver P 188 Shows software version of the regulator Encoder Fdbk P 189 The digital value from the encoder after all hardware and software scaling For use with pulse tachometer feedback only Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Not Installed 1 Installed 2 Failed Diags Diagnostics Read Only 0 0 2 Numeric Text Read Only Diagnostics 1 0x 1 04 1 xx RPM Diagnostics Read Only 0 4001 4001 Programming Parameters 5 69 DIAGNOSTICS Logic Status P 190 Displays the logic condition A typical value at power up would be 0000000000000101 i e drive is ready not running forward direction commanded no accel decel no alarm no fault etc Bit Definition Status 0 Enabled 1 Enabled 1 Running 1 Running 2 Command Dir 1 Forward 3 Actual Direction 1 Forward 4 Acceleration 1 Accelerating 5 Deceleration 1 Decelerating 6 Warning 1 Warning 7 Fault 1 Faulted 8 At Ref speed 1 AtRef 9 11 Local 12 15 Reference 000 Port 0 local 001 Port 1 local 010 Port 2 local 011 Port 3 local 100 Port 4 local 11
80. in the menu tree Select Pressing the SELect key alternately causes the top or bottom line of the display to become active The flashing first character indicates which line is active Increment Decrement These keys are used to increment and decrement a value or scroll through different groups or parameters Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Enter When pressed a group or parameter will be selected or a parameter value will be entered into memory After a parameter has been entered into memory the top line of the display will automatically become active allowing another parameter or group to be chosen JOG gt Programming Terminal 3 3 Run By default this key will initiate Drive operation if hardware is enabled ie Drive is ready and no other control devices are sending a Stop command To change this function the Start Mask P 201 or Logic Mask P 207 parameter must be reconfigured Refer to Chapter 5 If the Drive is jogging or already running the key has no effect Stop When pressed a stop sequence will be initiated causing a controlled stop to occur as determined by Stop Mode Type P 115 The HIM also sends a Fault Clear which can be masked Jog By default when this key is pressed the motor will jog at a speed determined by the Jog Reference P 093 parameter Releasing the key will cause the motor to ramp to zero and the contactor will open based on Jog Off Dly Time P 094
81. its 3 Spd Loop Fdbk 14 Zero maximum value the selected signal is at its 4 Spd Lp Ref 15 Full Scale full scale value 5 Spd Lp Error 16 Power Output 6 Spd Lp Out 17 OCL Ref 7 Spd Ramp Out 18 OCL Ramp Out 8 Spd Ramp In 19 OCL Feedback 9 Spd Src Out 20 OCL Output 10 Trim Output 21 Field Ref 22 Field Fdbk See Table A below for Full Scale Values Parameter Type Configurable Group Output Config Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Cur Lp Fdbk Maximum Value 22 Field Fdbk Table A Source Signal Values Signal Selected Full Scale Value Cur Loop Fdbk P 006 Cur Loop Ref P 008 Cur Loop Error P 007 Spd Loop Output P 024 Motor Arm Amps P 45 x Maximum Current P 40 100 Full Scale Value Spd Loop Fdbk P 022 Spd Loop Ref P 025 Spd Loop Error P 021 Spd Ramp Output P 028 Spd Ramp In TP P 027 Spd Src Output P 026 Trim Output P 030 Analog Tach Fdbk P 194 Encoder Fdbk P 189 OCL Output P 018 Top Speed Armature Voltage P 005 Motor Arm Volts Power Output Motor Arm Volts x Motor Arm Amps x Maximum Current 100 Fld Reference P 280 Field Feedback P 010 Motor Field Amps OCL Reference TP P 020 OCL Ramp Output P 019 OCL Feedback P 017 4095 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 59 OUTPUT CONFIG Dig Out 1 Sr
82. less than 200 0 to prevent the tach voltage from exceeding 250V overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause an who understands the significance of setting it Set the value of this parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value PPR Configurable Setup 18 18 2500 overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person A ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause an who understands the significance of setting it Set the value of this parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Programming Parameters 5 27 SETUP Encoder Quad P 049 Enables or disables encoder quadrature Encoder quadrature must be used on regenerative drives that use an encoder Set On for a bidirectional encoder Set Off for a unidirectional encoder Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text Configurable Setup 1 0 Off 1 On If Encoder Quad is set to Off and Pulse Tach is the selected Feedback Type type Neg Current Lim will be set to 0 and Reverse Disable set to On preventing
83. not be constant Therefore it is recommended that S Curve Rounding be set to 0 if Trim Mode Type is set to Proportional Incremental trim is not affected by this limitation This parameter also affects how the acceleration and deceleration times are interpreted Trim Range P 118 Uses the selected trim reference signal to generate draw percentage Determines how much the trim signal will affect the drive reference Trim Ref Source P 119 Trim reference source selection Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Tunable Feature Select 0 0 100 Numeric Text 0 Register 1 Anlg In 1 2 Anlg In 2 3 Anlg In 3 4 Anlg In 4 5 Frequency In 6 Adapter 1 7 Adapter 2 8 Adapter 3 9 Adapter 4 10 Adapter 5 11 Adapter 6 Tunable Feature Select 0 0 11 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 46 Programming Parameters FEATURE SELECT Trim Reference P 120 Drive register to manually set the trim reference value used by the drive OCL Enable Src P 121 Sets the source of the OCL enable signal Register means it comes from OCL Enable Terminal Blk means I O Expansion 64 Inertia Comp Reg P 122 Allows inertia compensation value to be entered via Datalink also when
84. otherwise Start Up and Adjustment 4 21 IMPORTANT Jumpers are read only on powerup so power must be cycled for a change to a jumper setting to be recognized by the Drive To set the jumpers 1 Remove power from the Drive Remove the cover Refer to Chapter 3 for cover removal You do need to remove the HIM bracket 2 The jumpers are located on the regulator board as shown in Figure 4 9 3 Change the jumper settings as described in the following description and record them in the Final Setting column of Table 4 G Table 4 G Jumper and Adjustment Settings Jumper Adjustment Default Setting Calculated Setting Final Setting J15 Regulator Type Speed J16 Program Protection Not Currently Used J20 Field Loss Detect Enable J21 Field Supply Jumper N A J19 Analog Ref 2 Pot J14 Tach V Range 62 J11 Tach V Scale 16 J10 Analog Ref 1 Volts J12 Analog Ref 1 Volts J18 ARM FB RB Position 4 1 Only applicable when the optional Enhanced Field Supply kit is installed Setting the Regulator Type Jumper J15 J15 determines whether the Drive uses speed voltage or torque current regulation mode This jumper is read only when the regulator is powered up When Current is selected all speed references become torque references For example Analog Ref 1 and Ref 2 are now Torque References Also note that speed voltage parameters must be set to provide overspeed protection for the Drive A
85. output that represents the selected speed voltage loop drive feedback value after all scaling Spd Loop Lag Out P 023 An output representing the value immediately after the Speed Loop Lag function Spd Loop Output P 024 Speed Loop PI function output value to the Current Loop Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value RPM Metering 8190 8190 RPM Metering 4095 4095 RPM Metering 4095 4095 AMPS Metering 1440 0 1440 0 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 20 Programming Parameters METERING Spd Loop Ref P 025 An output that represents the reference value to be used by the speed loop regulator in the drive Spd Src Output P 026 The user selected speed reference source value It is an input to the speed reference ramp section Spd Ramp In TP P 027 An output that represents the test point value immediately before the speed loop ramp function Spd Ramp Output P 028 An output that represents the test point value immediately after the speed loop ramp function Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Group Type
86. personnel by providing suitable guards audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that the drive is operating at or near zero speed Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Programming Parameters 5 37 REFERENCE SET Jog Off Dly Time P 094 Sets the amount of delay from releasing the Jog until the drive contactor opens Allows repeated jogging without cycling the contactor Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value SEC Configurable Reference Set 1 0 10 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 38 Programming Parameters FEATURE SELECT Min Speed Bypass P 099 Disables the Min Process Spd limit when ON When Off the Min Process Spd is the lower limit Ref Ramp Bypass P 100 Bypasses the Speed Loop Ramp block The bypass is automatically overridden during a stop command Note If bypassed rapid speed change can result Current Compound P 101 Sets the level of current compounding to be used during any mode of drive operation Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text Selectable Feature Select 0 0 Off 1 On this parameter is set to on The user is responsible for assuring safe ATTENTION This drive can operate at and maintain zero speed
87. straight shunt motor only Be sure to document the final connection 11 Apply power to the Drive 12 Repeat steps 6 and 7 and verify that the motor rotation is correct NOTE If both the field and armature connections are reversed no change in rotation direction will occur Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 32 Start Up and Adjustment Figure 4 14 Clockwise CW Rotation Bulletin 1397 Straight Shunt Machine CW Rotation Facing Commutator End Clockwise CW Rotation w Stab Shunt Motor Bulletin 1397 Basic Stabilized Shunt Machine CW Rotation Facing Commutator End No Feedback Device Installed Armature Voltage Control 1 Verify that Feedback Type P 039 is set to Arm Volt for armature voltage control 2 Proceed to Verification of Drive Calibration sequence Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Start Up and Adjustment 4 33 Analog Tachometer Polarity Checks Armature Voltage Control ATTENTION Prior to running polarity checks you must provide a hardwired maintained external operator accessible coast stop pushbutton at regulator board terminals 7 and 8 to disable the machine in case of improper operation Uncontrolled machine operation can result if this is not done Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life 1 Verify that Feedback Type P 039 is set to DC Tach 2 Verify that the tach is properly terminated by monitoring Anlg Tach Fdbk
88. when conditions for operating personnel by providing suitable guards audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that the drive is operating at or near zero speed Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text Tunable Feature Select 0 0 Off 1 On FLA Tunable Feature Select 0 50 50 Programming Parameters 5 39 FEATURE SELECT Inertia Comp Src P 102 Sets the source of the inertia compensation signal Internal uses Normal Inertia and Maximum Current params to determine amount of inertia compensation Monitor 1 Delay P 103 The delay time in seconds for the level detector 1 circuit Sets the amount of time between when the level detector timer is triggered and when the output is set on If the input source signal goes below the detector s threshold value the timer is immediately reset Refer to the Level Detectors block diagram Fig A 12 for additional Information Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Default Setting Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 NONE 1 INTERNAL 2
89. 0 Port 5 local 111 Multiplexed Drive Status P 191 This parameter displays the actual operating condition in text format AC Line Period P 192 Shows AC line as measured by the drive Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 0000 Master Ext Ref 1 0001 Int Ref 1 Preset 1 0010 Int Ref 2 Preset 2 0011 Int Ref 3 Preset 3 0100 Int Ref 4 Preset 4 0101 z Int Ref 5 Preset 5 0110 z Int Ref 6 Preset 6 0111 Int Ref 7 Preset 7 Sere YS a Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text Bit Enum Text Bit Enum Text 0 Enabled 10 Local ID 1 Running 11 Local ID 2 Command Dir 12 15 Reference ID 3 Actual Dir 4 Accelerating 5 Decelerating 6 Alarm 7 Faulted 8 At Speed 9 Local ID Diagnostics 0 0 15 1000 Master Ext Ref 2 1001 Port 1 Ext Ref 1010 Port 2 Ext Ref 1011 Port 3 Ext Ref 1100 Port 4 Ext Ref 1101 Port 5 Ext Ref 1110 Port 6 Ext Ref 1111 Int Jog Numeric Text 0 Not Ready 1 Ready 2 Running 3 Jogging Diagnostics 0 0 6 4 Tuning 5 Stopping 6 Faulted uSEC Read Only Diagnostics None 16 124 20833 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 70 Programming Parameters DIAGNOST
90. 0 50 125A XL70F Bussman 30 110 60 150A XL70F Bussman 40 110 75 200A XL70F Bussman 50 110 100 250A XL70F Bussman 60 110 125 300A XL70F Bussman 75 205 150 350A XL70F Bussman Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 26 Installation Figure 2 17 DC Drive Motor Field and Armature Connection Locations 1 5 30 HP at 230 VAC 7 110A O 380 415 VAC 3 60 HP at 460 VAC d DO Motor music P d T ae 45 DC Motor S B B DB Connections lesi n C2 C s 3 4 F1 F2 d GS H 7 La 1900 LB w E 6 de Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Installation 2 27 Figure 2 18 DC Motor Field and Armature Connection Locations 40 75 HP at 230 VAC 265A O 380 415 VAC 75 150 HP at 460 VAC i eljle dl Till 4FU SFU 6FU 1 FE GROUND POINT DB CONNECTIONS FOR OPTIONAL DC M
91. 0 Diagnostics 185 J21 Fld Supply Jmp Enum 0 1 0 Diagnostics 186 Power Unit Type Enum 0 1 0 Drive Info Diagnostics 187 Encoder Kit Enum 0 Not Install 2 Failed 0 Not Install Drive Info Diagnostics 188 Regulator SW Rev Text 1 04 1 xx 1 xx Drive Info Diagnostics 189 Encoder Fdbk RPM 4001 4001 0 Drive Info Diagnostics 190 Logic Status Enum 0 Enabled 15 RefID 0 Enabled Drive Info Diagnostics 191 Drive Status Enum 0 Not Ready 6 Faulted 0 Not Ready Drive Info Diagnostics 192 AC Line Period uSEC 16124 20833 0 Drive Info Diagnostics 193 AC Line Voltage VAC 200 575 0 Drive Info Diagnostics 194 Anlg Tach Fdbk RPM 4095 4095 0 Drive Info Diagnostics 195 Exp 1 10 DIG IN Enum O Preset A 4 OCLEn 0 Preset A Diagnostics Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 11 PARM NAME UNITS MIN MAX DEFAULT TYPE FUNCTION 196 Fault Reset Enum 0 Ready 1 Reset 0 Diagnostics 197 Alarm Reset Enum 0 Ready 1 Reset 0 Diagnostics 198 CPU Loading Diagnostics 199 Not Used 0 31 0 Diagnostics 200 ScanPort Errors 0 6500 0 Diagnostics 201 Start Mask Enum 0 127 126 Configurable Masks 202 Direction Mask Enum 0 127 127 Configurable Masks 203 Jog Mask Enum 0 127 127 Configurable Masks 204 Reference Mask Enum 0 127 127 Configurable Masks 205 Fault Reset Mask Enum 0 127 127 Configurable Masks 206 MOP Mask Enum 0 127 127 Configurable Masks 207 Logic Mask Enum 0 127 127 Configurable Masks 208 Local Mask Enum 0 127 127 Configurable Masks 209 MASKS
92. 000000000000000 000000000000000 0000 T ceo 110 0 de de de O 0000000 0000000000000000 000000000000000 00000 94 2 44 4 33 24 0 0 94 d P 32 0 WE 3DF4359 Filter Dimensions Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 CE Conformity B 7 Figure B 3 Side Mounting the 3DF4359 Filter in the L Bracket 212 0 0 47 dL NC 20 5 0 81 FILTER 245 d 0 96 DETAIL A M10 77 16 14 SCREWS 4 PLACES SEE DETAIL A 4 PLACES me Mounting the AC Line Inductor Note Many inductors are coated with varnish Any varnish on the mounting area must be removed to ensure conductivity See the manufacturer s documentation for additional mounting instructions Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 B 8 CE Conformity Grounding Requirements Star grounding must be used and must provide traditional product safety grounds such as high current low frequency and high frequency noise control System Power Ground The common power distribution system found in European countries includes the grounded neutral of the WYE transformer as shown in Figure B 4 This fourth wire provides the system ground for the electrical equipment and a return path for ground current A ground terminal of adequate size for the expected ground conductor must be provided for this ground wire because it will enter the cabinet combined with the three phase power leads If the power distribut
93. 007 Spd Loop Output P 024 Spd Loop Fdbk P 022 Top Speed Spd Loop Ref P 025 Spd Loop Error P 021 Spd Ramp Output P 028 Spd Ramp Input Tp P 027 Spd Sc Output P 026 Trim Output P 030 Analog Tach Fdbk P 194 Encoder Fdbk P 189 OCL Output P 018 Armature Voltage P 005 Motor Arm Volts Power Output Motor Arm Volts x Motor Arm Amps x Maximum Current 100 Fld Reference P 280 Motor Field Amps Field Feedback P 010 OCL Reference TP P 020 4095 OCL Ramp Output P 019 OCL Feedback P 017 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 53 OUTPUT CONFIG Anlg Out 1 Zero P 146 Removes any hardware introduced offset from the Analog 1 output signal at the regulator board terminal strip Anlg Out 2 Gain P 147 Scales the Analog 2 Output Signal at the regulator board terminal strip Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Tunable Output Config 0 200 200 Numeric Tunable Output Config 1 000 0 100 1 900 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 54 Programming Parameters OUTPUT CONFIG Anlg Out 2 Src P 148 Selects the drive testpoint that will source Display Drive Units
94. 01 5 62 Programming Parameters OUTPUT CONFIG Freq Out Zero P 161 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed The frequency generated when the signal driving the frequency output is zero If the signal goes negative the frequency output maintains the frequency set by this parameter Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value kHz 2 0 to 250 0 kHz Configurable Output Config 2 0 kHz 2 0 kHz 250 0 kHz DIAGNOSTICS Last Stop Cause P 166 Identifies the source of the signal which caused the most recent drive stop This parameter is Read Only Open SCR Sens P 167 Open SCR diagnostic sensitivity adjustment Unbalanced AC lines can cause load sharing differences between SCRs This parameter should be increased to increase the tolerance of SCR load sharing differences due to unbalanced lines Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 External 1 Jog 2 Internal 3 Current Limit 4 Ramp 5 Coast 6 7 Not Used 8 Fault 9 TB Interlock 10 TB Coast OB 11 M Contactor 12 15 Not Used Configurable Diagnostics N A N A N A Ki Tunable Diagnostics 0 0 100
95. 0V DC 4 20 mA 10 50 mA Converted within Drive to 12 bit plus sign Analog Reference 2 External potentiometer 5kQ min 10V DC Converted within Drive to 12 bit plus sign e DC Tachometer Input 10 250V DC Converted within Drive to 12 bit plus sign e 2 Analog Outputs 10V DC 4A maximum load In order to maintain simplicity the functions of the analog and digital inputs are fixed The analog and digital outputs however may be reconfigured See Chapter 5 for information on parameters that must be manipulated to reconfigure the outputs includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove AC line power to the Drive When AC input power is removed there will be a loss of inherent regenerative braking effect and the motor will coast to a stop An auxiliary braking method may be required ATTENTION The 1397 Drive control circuitry Control Wiring Procedure Installation 2 31 Most control connections on the 1397 Drive are made at the Regulator Board Terminal Strip which is located at the bottom of the Drive as shown in Figure 2 21
96. 1 WO Expansion Cord DB Dynamic Braking FS3 Enhanced Field Supply FS2 Field Current Regulator PE Pulse Encoder Kit AC AC Tachometer Kit IFB 400 600 HP only Specifications Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 COMMUNICATION OPTIONS Loose Kits OPTION CROSS REFERENCE 1203 GD1 Single Point Remote I O RIO 115V AC 380 415VAC 460VAC 1203 GD2 RS 232 422 485 DEI and DH485 Protocol 115VAC 7A 3 HP 1203 GK1 Single Point Remote I O RIO 24 VDC 29A 15 HP 1203 GK2 RS 232 Interface Brd 55A 30 HP 1203 GK5 DeviceNet 24 VDC 110A 60 HP HUMAN INTERFACE OPTIONS di Kee HAB Blank No Functionality HAP Programmer Only HA1 Programmer Controller with Analog Pot HA2 Programmer Controller with Digital Pot Input Voltage and Frequency Ratings Nominal Voltage 207 to 253 V AC or 414 to 506 V AC Horsepower rated drives 342 to 437 V AC or 374 V AC to 477 V AC Current rated drives Nominal Line Frequency 50 or 60 cycles per second Frequency Variation 2 cycles of nominal AC Line Fault Capacity Allowable AC Line Symmetrical See Power Ratings and Supply Capacity AC Line kVA AC Line Distribution Capacity Maximum 3 drives per transformer Minimum Source kVA See Power Ratings and Supply Capacity DC Voltage Ratings 230 VAC Line Armature Voltage 240 VDC Field Voltage w basic fld supply 150 V DC 380 415 V AC Line Armature Voltage 400 460 V DC Field Voltage w basic fld supply 250 270 V DC 460 VAC Line Arma
97. 10 358 om 3DF4357 265 L es E 5 E 3DF4358 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 HP Rating 3 5 75 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 177 213 jy CO1 co CH CO A Po D e CE Conformity B 3 Table B C AC Line Filter Model Numbers 3 to 300HP 460 VAC Minimum Inductance AC Line Filter AC Full Load Amps in microhenries uH Model Number 1680 1400 3DF4353 1125 1000 Eee 700 550 3DF4355 375 8 mo 225 3DF4357 E gt gt 7 195 150 120 ee 28 co co Two 3DF4359 filters connected in parallel Selecting an AC Line Inductor IMPORTANT A user supplied AC Line inductor must be installed between the Line filter and the AC power input of the 1397 Drive The inductor provides the impedance required by the line filter as shown in Table B A B B or B C This inductor also limits the SCR line commutation notch to less than 8096 when the Drive is connected to a 5 to 6 impedance source This meets the requirements of DIN 160 Line Notching If the Drive is to be used in an overload condition an inductor must be chosen that is rated for the resulting average RMS current and that will not saturate during overload Selecting an Operator Control Station If an operator control station is connected to the Drive its enclosure must be conductive metal The enclosure cover must be bonded to an internal ground point with a braided strap across the hinge Standard indus
98. 12 Autoref and J10 Autoref The Anlg In 1 jumpers J12 and J10 Fig 4 10 select the type of analog reference to be used J12 selects the type of signal voltage or milliamps J10 selects the range Figure 4 10 Anlg In 1 Jumper Selection 10 VOLTS MAX 4 20 mA 10 50 mA Jie J10 J12 op J12 310 WI vo rs 10 50 NJ VOLTS voLTs 10 50 sm VOLTS WI v LTS 10 50 mm VOLTS E BOTH RR 4 20 Ml BOTH If 4 20 BOTH HUE 4 20 B Mamps PARK MIN B waves PARK mH B mames PARK E Scaling the Armature Current Feedback Jumper 18 The Arm I FB RB jumper J18 scales the armature current feedback signal The Drive calculates the value of the burden resistor needed to scale the armature current feedback signal The calculations are based on the values of Motor Arm Amps P 045 and Maximum Current P 040 correct speed if jumpers J10 J12 and J18 are not set to the correct positions for your application Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION The Drive will not operate at the Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 26 Start Up and Adjustment Verify the Correct Operation of 24V UO Inputs 1 0 Point Rev Fwd Run STOP Jog The HIM displays the correct position of the jumper under the Diagnostics menu
99. 1397 5 30 400 600 HP 460V AC Line Filter Kit Allows power transformer greater than 2300V RMS to be applied to the 1397 5 31 600 HP 460V drive Dynamic Braking Resistor Assembly Provides instructions for properly attaching and lifting Dynamic Braking 1397 5 32 Lifting Instructions 250 600HP Kits Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Chapter Objectives Environment Mounting Chapter 2 Installation The following data will guide you in planning the installation of the 1397 Drive Since most start up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring every precaution must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed IMPORTANT You are responsible for completing the installation wiring and grounding of the 1397 Drive and for complying with all National and Local Electrical Codes guide for proper installation The National Electrical Code and any other governing regional or local code will overrule this information The Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this Drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a The Drive must be mounted in a clean dry location Contaminants such as oils corrosive vapors and abrasive debris must be kept out of the
100. 158 Dig Out 2 Type Selection 0 Open Closed 0 Open Configurable Output Config 159 Dig Out Scale kHz 2 0 250 0 250 0 Configurable Output Config 160 Freq Out Src Enum 0 22 14 Configurable Output Config 161 Freq Out Zero kHz 2 0 250 0 2 0 Configurable Output Config 162 Out CFG 1 Hidden FUTURE USE Output Config 163 Out CFG 2 Hidden FUTURE USE Output Config 164 Out CFG 3 Hidden FUTURE USE Output Config 165 Out CFG 4 Hidden FUTURE USE Output Config 166 Out CFG 5 Hidden FUTURE USE Output Config 167 Open SCR Sens 0 0 0 Tunable Diagnostics 168 Open SCR Trp Pt 800 4000 800 Tunable Diagnostics 169 Phase Test Delta Degrees 0 180 0 Tunable Diagnostics 170 Phase Test Bridge Selection O Forward 1 Reverse 0 Tunable Diagnostics 171 Armature Bridge Enum O Forward 1 Reverse 0 Diagnostics 172 Armature Delta uSEC 6480 6480 0 Diagnostics 173 Cur Compound TP RPM 4095 4095 0 Diagnostics 174 Field Delta DEG 5400 5400 0 Diagnostics 175 Fld Econ Active Enum 0 Not Active 1 Active 0 Not Active Diagnostics 176 Field Ref TP Amps 0 1 15 0 0 Diagnostics 177 Field Regulator Enum Not Install 20 Amp NA Diagnostics 178 Expansion I O Enum 0 Not Instal 3 Failed Not Install Diagnostics 179 IR Comp TP Volt 0 338 0 Diagnostics 180 J11 Tach V Scale Text 1920 1920 0 Diagnostics 181 J14 Tach V Range Enum 0 1 0 Diagnostics 182 J15 Reg Type Enum 0 1 0 Diagnostics 183 J18 Arm Fdbk Res Enum 0 4 0 Diagnostics 184 J20 Fld Loss Det Enum 0 1
101. 17 OCL Feedback 0 56 Future Use 18 OCL Output 0 57 Anlg Tach Gain 1 000 19 OCL Ramp Output 0 58 Anlg Tach Zero 0 20 OCL Reference TP 0 59 Arm Voltage Gain 1 0 21 Spd Loop Error 0 60 Arm Voltage Zero 0 22 Spd Loop Fdbk 0 61 Cur Loop K Fdbk 1 00 23 Spd Loop Lag Out 0 62 CurLp Lead Freq 100 24 Spd Loop Output 0 63 Cur Loop Kp 0 250 25 Spd Loop Ref 0 64 Cur Loop Rate Lim 40 26 Spd Src Output 0 65 Future Use 27 Spd Ramp In TP 0 66 IR Compensation 0 28 Spd Ramp Output 0 67 Pos Cur Lim 150 29 Speed Pot 0 68 Neg Cur Lim 150 30 Trim Output 0 69 Pos Cur Lim Src Register 31 Torque Reference 0 70 Neg Cur Lim Src Register 32 Future Use 71 PLL Max Error 2 33 Future Use 72 SpdLead Lag Freq 1 00 34 Future Use 73 Lead Lag Ratio 2 35 Future Use 74 Spd Lead Lag Type Bypass 36 CT Turns Ratio 32767 75 Spd Lp Lag Freq 3 00 37 Accel Time 50 76 Spd Lp Lag Type On 38 Decel Time 50 77 Spd Lp Lead Freq 3 00 39 Feedback Type 0 Arm Volt 78 Spd Loop Kp 4 40 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 D 14 Using SCANport Capabilities No Name Default Value No Name Default Value 79 Tach Loss Angle 109 118 Trim Range 0 80 ADV SETUP 2 0 119 Trim Ref Source 0 81 ADV SETUP 3 0 120 Trim Reference 0 82 ADV SETUP 4 0 121 OCL Enble Src 0 Register 126 Inertia Comp Reg 0 83 ADV
102. 2 Cleaning a Fault cic auci dg eg CR OR RR P ero eS 6 2 Clearing an Alarm cece sexu ER RE ER ERE ER 6 2 Fault Description Table 2 ea gates cenae rri RR FE ra A 6 3 Alarm Description Table ossesi eub RE EE RR 6 7 Firmware Block Diagram Appendix A Standard Inpule 24434233293 293 t Te REESE APO E A 1 I O Expansion Inputs 243 deeg EE EE A 2 Speed Trim Reference Geer A 3 Speed Reference Ramp occccoccccccc A 4 Outer Control Loop Za AE ENEE AE AE E AE ERES A 5 Speed Reference Mode Select A 6 Speed Loop etus area uS UEREREP CORE PA E E Re ade cd A 7 Current Minor Loop Reference A 8 Current Minor LOOP cca crass t Rr dE EE A 9 Field Control Loop 2 2 dace ccbed ders EE REI DERE ERES A 10 Standard Outputs usa cae eae n x ER ERR ER ERES A 11 Level Detectors osse ca oes rita resta dae ras EE EE A A 12 I O Expansion Outputs 2 0205 ees eee ea RP ee Re RPE Eee A 13 CE Conformity Appendix B ENC Conpliante coca brains B 1 EMC Requirements B 1 Equipment Requirements 00 cece eee eens B 1 Mounting the Equipment B 4 Grounding Requirements B 8 Wiring the Equipment EENS EE EE cies eee ss B 10 Derating Appendix C High Ambient Temperature Conditions C 1 Derating for High Altitude lt lt eee eee eee C 2 Air Conditioning ocicee eee ka p RE REY RR ER ERE Rn C 2 Space Heaters enses I ra RR Ex C 2 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 iv Table of Contents Using SCANpo
103. 24VDC common of the regulator board terminal strip 14 424V 15 24V COM 24V DC Power Supply Wire sizes must be selected individually observing all applicable safety and NEC regulations The minimum permissible wire size does not necessarily result in the best operating economy Due to the Drive overload capacity the conductors for the transformer primary and secondary must be sized at a minimum for 125 of the full load Drive line current The motor armature conductors must also be rated for 12596 at a minimum of the full load motor current Shielded type wire is recommended in control circuits for protection against interference A shielded wire is required for all signal wires The recommended conductor size must be a minimum of 24 AWG The best interference suppression is obtained with a wire having an individual shield for every pair Table 2 B provides a listing and description of cable types and wiring recommendations Figure 2 9 shows recommended cable shielding Note that wiring classes are for reference only and are not associated with any code or standard Figure 2 11 Cable Shielding Recommendations 2 Conductor Shielded Cable Shield Connection AT 2 Conductor Shielded Cable Multi Conductor Shielded Cable with Individual Shielded Pairs ooloo osnco ao Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 16 Installation Table 2 B Cable and Wiring Recommendations Minimum Spacing in Inches between Classes Wi
104. 28 Datalink B2 Data In B2 p 229 Datalink C12 Data In C1 p 230 Datalink C2 Data In C2 p 231 Datalink D1 Data In D1 p 232 Datalink D2 Data In D2 p 233 Input Image Logic Status Logic Status p 190 Feedback Spd Loop Fabk p 022 Datalink A19 Data Out A1 p 234 Datalink A2 Data Out A2 p 235 Datalink B1 Data Out B1 p 236 Datalink B22 Data Out B2 p 237 Datalink C19 Data Out C1 p 238 Datalink C29 Data Out C2 p 239 Datalink D1 Data Out D1 p 240 Datalink D2 Data Out D2 p 241 d Message O Available only in enhanced mode 2 Optionally enabled via G file in SLC processor Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 D 8 Using SCANport Capabilities DeviceNet Communications Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for a DeviceNet scanner relates to the 1397 Drive when a DeviceNet Communications Module is used SCANport 1203 Gx5 1397 Drive DeviceNet to SCANport Logic Command Logic Command Reference Reference Datalink A1 Data In A1 Output Datalink A2 Data In A2 p 226 l p 227 Mapping Datalink B1 Data In B1 p 228 Write Datalink B2 Data In B2 p 229 Datalink C1 Data In C1 p 230 Datalink C2 Data In C2 p 231 Datalink D1 Data In D1 p 232 Datalink D2 Data In D2 p 233 Logic Status Feedback Datalink A1 Input Datalink A2 Mapping Datalink B1 Read Datalink B2 Datalink C1 Datalink C2 Datalink D1 Datalink D2 Message Message E Handler
105. 3 7 BEENUMS TEE 3 7 Process Mode Beer geg Aere Kerg de eos 3 8 Eprom Mode cidos rl erre E 3 9 e A o 3 12 Control Stalus ModE i s iue Le ee ENEE ER EC 3 12 Chapter 4 A um Se cedro cede CE e OP SER Rd 4 1 Required Tools and Equipment 000 oooooo 4 2 Recommended Tools and Equipment 4 2 General EE 4 2 Drive Hardware Adjustments 4 3 Motor Ground Check 4 6 Pre Power Checks 4 6 Pre Power Checklist llli 4 7 Field Supply Configuration 4 8 Power On Checks o 0oooooccocoocccrncr 4 14 Parameter Set Up csse ce cer er RR rx nna 4 15 Parameter Modification Sequence 0 o o oo 4 17 Juniper Settings d sierra EE a He E 4 20 Verify the Correct Operation of 24V I O Inputs 4 26 Motor and Feedback Polarity Checks ooo o 4 29 uero EEN 4 35 Auto Tune Set Up 2 cece cece ees 4 36 Aul Tune Execution ssis 663 416m Ete gis prep tikes 4 37 Application Set Up 4 38 Chapter 5 Ire casi ened sna cor pra RE A 5 1 Record Keeping os cig pb asa bes eas peed ie eset ees 5 1 Safety Precautions liliis 5 2 Parameter Groups EE bea eee eres erase rede 5 2 Numeric Parameter Table ooooooooooooomo 5 6 Parameter Descriptions By Group 5 14 Parameters Alphabetical 5 97 Hidden Parameters ENEE NEEN Rm 5 100 Table of Contents iii Troubleshooting Chapter 6 RP PR 6 1 Required Equipment 6 1 issu gta EE 6
106. 500 Tunable Advanced Setup 0 250 0 4 000 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 30 Programming Parameters ADV SETUP Cur Loop RateLim P 064 Minimum allowable time for selected Current Loop reference to change from zero to Maximum Current IR Compensation P 066 Sets the armature voltage compensation value used when the drive is configured as a voltage regulator This parameter is also used by the field current regulator to set the field weakened threshold Pos Current Lim P 067 Sets the highest amount of current motor rated armature amps for the forward bridge Used as a high limit for the speed loop Pl block output Neg Current Lim P 068 Note This parameter is only set for regenerative drives Selects the highest amount of current motor rated armature amps for the reverse bridge Used as a low limit for the Speed Loop PI block output Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value MSEC Tunable Advanced Setup 40 1 000 100 Motor Arm Volts P046 Advanced Setup 0 0 50 FLA Tunable
107. 7 5 47 Data In A1 226 5 78 Anlg In 1 Type 128 5 47 Data In A2 227 5 78 Anlg In 1 Zero 129 5 47 Data in B1 228 5 78 Anlg In 2 Gain 130 5 47 Data in B2 229 5 78 Anlg In 2 Zero 131 5 48 Data in ct 230 5 79 Autotune Bridge 112 5 43 Data in C2 231 5 79 Anlg Out 1 Gain 144 5 51 Data In D1 232 5 79 Anlg Out 1 Src 145 5 52 Data In D2 233 5 79 Anlg Out 1 Zero 146 5 53 Data Out A1 234 5 80 Anlg Out 2 Gain 147 5 53 Data Out A2 235 5 80 Anlg Out 2 Src 148 5 54 Data Out B1 236 5 80 Anlg Out 2 Zero 149 5 55 Data Out B2 237 5 80 Anlg Out 3 Gain 150 5 55 Data Out C1 238 5 81 Anlg Out 3 Src 151 5 56 Data Out C2 239 5 81 Anlg Out 3 Type 152 5 57 Data Out D1 240 5 81 Anlg Out 4 Gain 153 5 57 Data Out D2 241 5 81 Anlg Out 4 Src 154 5 58 Decel Time 038 5 23 Anlg Tach Gain 057 5 28 Direction Mask 202 5 72 Anlg Tach Zero 058 5 28 Direction Owner 216 5 75 Anlg Tach V 1000 047 5 26 Dig Out 1 Src 155 5 59 Armature Bridge 171 5 63 Dig Out 1 Type 156 5 59 Armature Delta 172 5 64 Dig Out 2 Src 157 5 60 Arm Volt 005 5 15 Dig Out 2 Type 158 5 60 Arm Voltage Gain 059 5 28 Draw Percent Out 009 5 16 Arm Voltage Zero 060 5 29 Drive Status 191 5 69 AutoTune Fld Rng 113 5 44 E Fld Volts Adj 272 5 87 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 98 Programming Parameters Name No See Page Name No SeePage Page Name No See Page Encoder Fdbk 189 5 68 J18 Arm Fdbk Res 183 5 67 Encoder Kit 187 5 68 J20 Fld Loss Det 184 5
108. 7 DATA OUT B2 Param 0 308 0 Read 8 Write Adapter I O 238 DATA OUT C1 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 239 DATA OUT C2 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 240 DATA OUT D1 Param 0 308 0 Read amp Write Adapter I O 241 DATA OUT D2 Param 0 308 0 Read 8 Write Adapter I O 242 ADPT IO 1 FUTURE USE Adapter VO 243 ADPT IO 2 FUTURE USE Adapter VO 244 ADPT IO 3 FUTURE USE Adapter VO 245 ADPT IO 4 FUTURE USE Adapter I O 246 ADPT IO 5 FUTURE USE Adapter I O 247 PROCESS 1 PAR Numeric 0 308 5 Read amp Write Process Display 248 PROCESS 1 SCALE Scale x 100 327 68 4327 67 1 00 Read amp Write Process Display 249 PROCESS 1 TEXT 1 ASCII 32 127 86 Read amp Write Process Display 250 PROCESS 1 TEXT2 ASCII 32 127 111 Read amp Write Process Display 251 PROCESS 1 TEXT3 ASCII 32 127 108 Read amp Write Process Display 252 PROCESS 1 TEXT4 ASCII 32 127 116 Read amp Write Process Display 253 PROCESS 1 TEXT5 ASCII 32 127 115 Read amp Write Process Display 254 PROCESS 1 TEXT6 ASCII 32 127 32 Read amp Write Process Display 255 PROCESS 1 TEXT7 ASCII 32 127 32 Read amp Write Process Display 256 PROCESS 1 TEXT8 ASCII 32 127 32 Read amp Write Process Display 257 PROCESS 2 PAR Numeric 0 308 6 Read amp Write Process Display 258 PROCESS 2 SCALE Scalex100 327 68 327 67 1 00 Read amp Write Process Display 259 PROCESS 2 TEXT 1 ASCII 32 127 65 Read amp Write Process Display 260 PROCESS 2TEXT2 ASCII 32 127 109 Read amp Wr
109. 70 5 10 65 TOP mi 300 0 gt 11 81 SIDE Rec Hardware 3 x M6 or 1 4 All Dimensions Millimeters and Inches Approximate Shipping Weight 30 8 kg 68 Ibs Figure 2 3 Drive Mounting Dimensions 40 to 75 HP at 230 VAC 265A 380 415 VAC 75 to 150 HP at 460 VAC gt 375 1 48 A ne A AO O P y AS d o J e 162 Allen Bradley 491 8 S d 19 36 igi 182 183 4o o op S seuna oo o o o o a eo a e soe 168 a 0 66 i TZ mw y YY ai MUA WAX E 37 5 3900 SEN E 375 0 14 76 461 6 gt 18 17 FRONT i boue i CIE xl E E NS 531 7 B 20 93 E 509 5 20 06 d E B i elei sr siele i Gelee z L OT Slslslahel e T Jj HOO GE y l Djela e lt 461 6 gt 18 17 TOP
110. 9 Data Out D1 p 240 Data Out D2 p 241 O Optionally enabled using DIP switches on the adapter Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 D 10 8 words maximum 8 words maximum Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Using SCANport Capabilities Remote I O Communications Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for the programmable controller relates to the 1397 Drive when a Remote I O Communications Module is used PLC 1 0 Image Output Image Input Image RIO SCANport Remote I O Communications Module Block Transfer Logic Command Reference Datalink A19 Datalink A29 Datalink B19 Datalink B29 Datalink C19 Datalink C29 Datalink D19 Datalink D2 Block Transfer Logic Status Feedback Datalink A19 Datalink A29 Datalink B19 Datalink B2 Datalink C19 Datalink C2 Datalink D19 Datalink D2 Optionally enabled using DIP switches on the module Flex I O Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for the programmable controller relates to the 1397 Drive when a Flex I O Module is used Flex Adapter RIO DeviceNet ControlNet Others SCANport 1203 FM1 and 1203 FB1 Modules Logic Command Reference Logic Status Feedback 1397 Drive Logic Command Reference Data In A1 p 226 Data In A2 p 227 Data In B1 p 228 Data In B2 p 229 Data In C1 p 230 Data In C2 p 231 Data In D1 p 232 Data In D2
111. 9 0 Metering 5 Armature Voltage Volts 675 675 0 Metering 6 Cur Loop Fdbk Amps 2400 2400 0 Metering 7 Cur Loop Error Amps 3840 3840 0 Metering 8 Cur Loop Ref Amps 4440 1440 0 Metering 9 Draw Percent Out 96 0 10 100 0 0 Metering 10 Field Feedback Amps 0 0 20 0 0 Metering 11 Frequency In KHZ 2000 2000 0 Metering 12 Jog Ramp Output RPM 5000 5000 0 Metering 13 Monitor 1 Output O OFF 1 ON 0 Metering 14 Monitor 2 Output O OFF 1 ON 0 Metering 15 MOP Output RPM 5000 5000 0 Metering 16 OCL Enable TP 0 Disabled 1 Enable 0 Metering 17 OCL Feedback CNTS 5120 5120 0 Metering 18 OCL Output RPM 5000 5000 0 Metering 19 OCL Ramp Output CNTS 4095 4095 0 Metering 20 OCL Reference TP CNTS 4095 4095 0 Metering 21 Spd Loop Error RPM 8190 8190 0 Metering 22 Spd Loop Fdbk RPM 4095 4095 0 Metering 23 Spd Loop Lag Out RPM 4095 4095 0 Metering 24 Spd Loop Output AMPS 1440 1440 0 00 Metering 25 Spd Loop Ref RPM 5000 5000 0 Metering 26 Spd Src Output RPM 5000 5000 0 Metering 27 Spd Ramp In TP RPM 5000 5000 0 Metering 28 Spd Ramp Output RPM 5000 5000 0 Metering 29 Speed Pot RPM 5000 5000 0 Metering 30 Trim Output RPM 5000 5000 0 Metering 31 Torque Reference AMPS 960 960 0 Metering 32 METERING 1 Hidden FUTURE USE Metering 33 METERING 2 Hidden FUTURE USE Metering 34 METERING 3 Hidden FUTURE USE Metering 35 METERING 4 Hidden FUTURE USE Meterin 36 CT Turns Ratio TP TN 1 32767 NA Configurable Setup 37 Accel Time Seconds 0 1
112. 97 5 0 June 2001 4 6 Start Up and Adjustment Motor Ground Check Pre Power Checks Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 ground check but all conductors between the motor and the Drive must be disconnected The megohmeter s high voltage can damage the Drive s electronic circuits Disconnect all conductors between the motor and Drive before using a megohmeter for this motor ground check Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION A megohmeter can be used for this The DC motor frame and conduit box should be connected to a good earth ground per the motor instruction Verify that there is no path to ground in either the DC motor armature circuit the shunt field circuit or the thermostat circuit Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the motor frame and the other lead to the two armature leads then to the two field leads and to the two thermostat leads If a reading of less than 100 000 ohms is observed a ground condition exists and MUST be corrected before power is applied Verify that the Drive has been installed and wired per the installation instructions listed in Chapter 2 Installation Of particular importance are the following e Drive Mounting e Safety Grounds e General Wiring e Secure mounting of all connections and components ATTENTION Failure to follow wiring guidelines set forth in Chapter 2 Installation may result in machine malfunction o
113. Adapter 5 1 1 0 1 Adapter 6 1 1 1 0 Jog Frequency 1 1 1 1 LOGIC COMMAND FORMAT Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 BitO Reference Select Unused Unused Direction l Stop u Y Jog Reference 14 131 No Command 0 0 0 Clear Faults Ref 1 001 Ref 2 010 Direction 5 4 Preset 1 0 1 1 No Command 0 0 Preset 2 100 Forward 0 1 Preset 3 101 Reverse 1 0 Not Used 110 Hold Direction 1 1 Not Used 111 Y Y Local Lockout Y MOP Increment MOP Decrement Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Using SCANport Capabilities D 13 User Parameter Values Use the tables on the following pages to record your particular parameter value setting for the current application No Name Default Value No Name Default Value 1 Anlg In 1 0 40 Maximum Current 150 2 Anlg In 2 0 41 Max Motor Speed 500 3 Anlg In 3 0 42 Max Process Speed 500 4 Anlg In 4 0 43 Min Process Speed 250 5 Armature Voltage 0 44 Motor Field Amps 0 01 6 Cur Loop Fdbk 0 45 Motor Arm Amps 8 7 Cur Loop Error 0 46 Motor Arm Volts 240 8 Cur Loop Ref 0 47 Anlg Tach V 100 18 0 V 9 Draw Percent Out 0 48 Encoder PPR 18 10 Field Feedback 0 49 Encoder Quad On 11 Frequency In 0 50 Nominal AC Freq 50 or 60 Hz 12 Jog Ramp Output 0 51 Nominal AC Volts 230 VAC 13 Monitor 1 Output 1 52 Auto Tune Type 14 Monitor 2 Output 53 Future Use 15 MOP Output 0 54 Future Use 16 OCL Enable TP 1 55 Future Use
114. Advanced Set Up 150 0 Max Setting of Param 040 Note Setting of this parameter is limited by the setting of Parm 040 FLA Tunable Advanced Setup 150 0 200 Programming Parameters 5 31 ADV SETUP Pos Cur Lim Src P 069 Selects the source for the positive current limit If Register is selected the reference is Pos Cur Lim The I O Expansion kit must be installed to use Analog In 3 terminals 50 and 51 on the I O Expansion board Analog In 4 terminals 52 and 53 or Frequency In terminals 39 40 and 41 Neg Cur Lim Src P 070 Selects the source for the negative current limit If Register is selected Neg Cur Lim is used as the limit The analog input choices are only available if the I O Expansion kit is installed The Network choices are only available if the Network Option kit is installed Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Register 1 Analog In 3 2 Analog In 4 3 Frequency In 4 Adapter 1 5 Adapter 2 6 Adapter 3 7 Adapter 4 8 Adapter 5 9 Adapter 6 Register Configurable Advanced Set Up 0 0 9 Numeric Text 0 Register 1 Analog In 3 2 Analog In 4 3 Frequency In 4 Adapter 1 5 Adap
115. Block Diagram Speed Ref Ramp Software INTERNAL Sic Block Diagram Scaling P 102 ANLG IN 3 ANLG IN 4 FREQUENCY IN ADAPTOR 1 6 From I O Exp Inputs Block Diagram Default Selection From SCANport Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Firmware Block Diagrams A 9 Figure A 9 Current Minor Loop Cur Loop Ref ARM BRIDGE P 00 Current Loop K P 171 8 P 063 g ARM DELTA P 172 From Current Minor Loop Reference Block Diagram DRIVE TEST MODE KP IN PI OUT KI ARM PHASE FIRE Cur Loop Fdbk P 006 ADAPTIVE GAIN LOGIC Cur Loop K Fdbk P 061 S6 S6R POWER UNIT 3 Phase AC Line RATE LIM Cur Lp Lead Freq P 062 CT TURNS RATIO P 036 SOFTWARE SCALING ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER RECTIFIER Current Feedback Test Point Jumper J17 ARM 1 J18 ARM FDBK RES Hardware scaling jumper J18 ARM FDBK RES Ground Jumper J22 GROUND Default Selection Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 A 10 Motor Field Amps P 044 HI Fid Econ Active Field Q P 175 Reference P 280 Le O O 0 Motor Field GAIN Amps P 044 MUL DIV Fld 100 Econ Ref P 274 from Field SOFTWARE Motor Field Amps P 044 Fld Weaken QO Level OS P 284 Cur Loop Sec SOFTWARE 8s SCALING sample average IR Compensation P 066 Arm Volt P 005 Publication 1397 5 0 J
116. Bulletin 1397 Bulletin 1397 Basic Stabilized Shunt Machine Straight Shunt Machine CCW Rotation Facing Commutator End CCW Rotation Facing Commutator End 400 to 600HP 460VAC A2 S1 S2 A2 S1 S2 Link DBR Link DBR Removed Installed A2 S1 A2 S1 Bulletin 1397 Bulletin 1397 Basic Stabilized Shunt Machine Straight Shunt Machine CCW Rotation Facing Commutator End If Used CCW Rotation Facing Commutator End 1 In cases where full regenerative torque capability is required for braking or slow down operation or where the drive will be applied for bi directional operation you should specify straight shunt DC motors wound without a series field winding to assure symmetrical motor operation in both forward and reverse directions full torque capability and motor stability under any mode of operation 2 If this connection of the motor armature leads results in motor rotation opposite of what is required reverse the A1 and A2 lead connections at the motor 3 Connect Drive Terminal A2 S1 or S2 to motor terminal A2 2 The 1397 is supplied with semi conductor fuses for line protection An isolation transformer can also be used In general the 1397 is suitable for direct connection to a correct voltage AC line that has minimum impedance of 3 If the Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Installation 2 19 line is lower impedance a line reactor or isolation transformer must be added upline from the Drive to increase line impedance I
117. Control Board option kit to install the board before proceeding with control wiring Option Board are at Line Voltages when connected to sources of incoming AC power Disconnect Tag and Lockout all sources of AC power to the Drive and the 115VAC Option Board before performing the following procedure Failure to observe these precautions could result in personal injury or loss of life ATTENTION The Drive and 115 VAC Control 115V AC COAST TO STOP inputs are installed at terminals 7 and 8 of the CON2 connector on the 115VAC option board as shown in Figure 2 24 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 36 Installation 115V HI L1 vo RUN IN1 v STOP IN2 Figure 2 24 CON 2 Terminal Strip 115 VAC Inputs S es E _2 g 2 S z E a zu e Z E e e ug RB Sa 2s GE ZE Ur d sa r ES Ra 9 o Ord nog t Su bZ 38E 22545 Sener Ss cossre 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 H 12 13 14 2 Wiring Customer Interlocks Wire the Customer Interlock as shown in Figure 2 25 Both the 24V Regulator Board Terminal Strip and the 115 VAC CON2 Terminal Strip utilize terminal 9 and 11 as the connection point for a Customer Interlock All customer interlocks must be closed for Drive operation and CANNOT be masked Figure 2 25 Wiring Customer Interlocks Customer Interlock IN7 115VAC Customer Interlock Circuit Regulator Board Terminal Strip 24VDC Customer Interlock Circuit Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 115VAC Option Board CON 2 115VAC C
118. EProm menu see steps A C above press the Increment Decrement keys until Drive HIM is displayed B Press Enter A profile name up to 14 characters will be displayed on line 2 of the HIM This name can be changed or a new name entered Use the SEL key to move the cursor left The Increment Decrement keys will change the character EEProm Drive gt HIM Drive gt HIM 1A Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 3 10 Programming Terminal Drive gt HIM continued C Press Enter An informational display will be shown indicating the Drive type and firmware version D Press Enter to start the upload The parameter number currently being uploaded will be displayed on line 1 of the HIM Line 2 will indicate total progress Press ESC to stop the upload E Completed displayed on line 2 will indicate a successful upload Press Enter If ERROR is displayed see Chapter 6 1397 DC Drive Version 1 00 Drive gt HIM 60 Drive gt HIM 210 Completed HIM Drive t t t t 3 To download a parameter profile from the HIM to a Drive Important The download function will only be available when there is a valid profile stored in the HIM A From the EEProm menu see steps 1A 1C press the Increment Decrement keys until HIM gt Drive is displayed B Press the Enter key A profile name will be displayed on line 2 of the HIM Pressing the Incremen
119. Fault points during operation lt O 32 T DS Regulator Board Terminal Strip Software Configurable Output Connections Drive Contacts Shown In Unpowered State Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 TB 04 TB 05 TB 06 TB 07 TB 08 TB 09 TB 10 Installation 2 33 JOG This is a edge sensitive signal that initiates a Jog command 0 e 1 Jog 0 Not Jog If the Drive is READY and not already RUNNING voltage will be applied causing the motor to reach the value of Jog Reference The Drive will Jog for only as long as this input is asserted This input can be masked through the Jog Mask P 203 or Logic Mask P 207 parameter When released the Drive will ramp to zero speed based on the Jog Acc Dec Time P 092 The contactor will open based on Jog Off Dly Time P 094 REVERSE FORWARD This is a Level sensitive signal that selects the commanded direction Forward 0 or Reverse 1 This input can be masked through the Direction Mask P 202 or Logic Mask P 207 parameter If it is not masked it will assume control of the drive reference REFERENCE SELECT This is a edge sensitive signal that selects between REF 1 Source 1 and REF2 Source 0 parameters to be used as a reference to the Drive The input can be masked through the Reference Mask P 204 or Logic Mask P 207 parameters If it is not masked it will assume control of the Drive reference If an I O Expansion board is insta
120. ICS AC Line Voltage P 193 Shows AC line voltage as measured by the drive Analog Tach Fdbk P 194 The digital value of the analog tachometer feedback input after all hardware and software scaling For use with analog tachometer feedback AC or DC only Exp I O Dig In P 195 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Shows the state of all I O expansion digital inputs terminals 59 64 on the I O Expansion board The input is On when 24 VDC is applied for more than 20 mS It is Off when 0 VDC is applied Information is displayed in binary format Fault Reset P 196 Allows resetting of the fault or alarm through the HIM Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value VAC Read Only Diagnostics None 200 575 RPM N A Output Diagnostics 0 4095 4095 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Preset A 1 Preset B 2 Decrement Bit Enum Text 3 Increment 4 OCL Enable Preset B Preset A MOP Dec MOP Inc OCL Enable Numeric Text 0 Ready Diagnostics 0 0 1 1 R
121. Inertia Comp Src P 102 is set to Register The value of this parameter is not saved through a power cycle it is reset to zero at power up Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Parameter Setting Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Parameter Setting Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 100 0 Tunable Feature Select 0 100 100 Numeric Text 0 Register 1 Terminal Blk Feature Select Tunable 0 0 1 CNTS Counts 0 4095 Feature Select Tunable 0 0 4095 Programming Parameters 5 47 INPUT CONFIG Anlg In 1 Gain P 127 Used to scale the analog input 1 signal after it has been conditioned by the drive hardware Typically it will be 1 000 Anlg In 1 Type P 128 Selects the analog input 1 signal type Note Jumpers J10 and J12 must be set for the same type of signal selected by this parameter Anlg In 1 Zero P 129 Used to remove any hardware introduced Offset from the analog auto reference signal Typically it will be 0 Anlg In 2 Gain P 130 Scales the manual mode analog reference signal after it has been conditioned by the drive hardware Typically it will be 1 000 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group
122. Interface Module see Chapter 3 Programming A ATTENTION The 1397 control circuitry includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required in addition to the required hard wired Coast to Stop circuit to remove AC line power to the Drive When AC input power is removed there will be a loss of inherent regenerative braking effect and the motor will coast to a stop An auxiliary braking method may be required IMPORTANT Use the EEPROM mode in the programming terminal to save all parameter changes to EEPROM or they will be lost when power is removed from the Drive A ATTENTION The incorrect setting of Setup parameters can cause an overspeed condition These parameters must be set by a qualified person who understands the significance of setting them Verify that the value of these parameters are set accurately for your application requirements Failure to observe this precaution could result in personal injury or equipment damage Start Up and Adjustment 4 17 Table 4 E Parameter Modification Sequence Parameter Name Par No Default Description User Setting Stop Mode Type P 115 Coast P 115 Selects stopping mode of the Drive in response to a normal Stop Stop Speed Level P 116 command P 116 sets the threshold speed below which the main Feature Select Group conta
123. J18 Arm Fdbk Res P 183 Verify this jumper setting before performing the self tuning procedure Table 4 J lists the standard 1397 I O input points indicating those hardware inputs which are required for Drive operation Some of these signals may be generated by the terminal strip or a SCANport device or HIM or both These signals are identified in the table by the column labeled Alternate Control Source NOTE Required signals MUST be correctly wired to the terminal strip for proper Drive operation and cannot be masked Signals that are not required may be masked off for exclusive control by a SCANport device or HIM Masking parameters are described in detail in Chapter 5 Programming Parameters IMPORTANT Regulator Board terminal Strip Inputs 3 8 9 12 and 13 must be closed for the Drive to be ready Table 4 J Standard I O Functions Active Function Start when CLOSED Stop when OPEN Jog when closed Forward Open Rev Closed Selects Analog Ref 2 when Open Selects Analog Ref 1 when Closed Opens AC or DB Contactor if installed when OPEN Motor Coasts to Stop Customer Opens AC contactor when OPEN Interlock motor coasts to stop Fault Alarm Reset Resets fault acknowledges alarm when CLOSED Brush Wear When OPEN activates warning Motor will still run Opens AC contactor when OPEN motor coasts to stop Analog Ref 1 External speed reference selected when REF SELECT CLOSED Analog Ref 2 External speed ref
124. Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 None 1 Cur Lp Fdbk 2 Analog In 3 3 Analog In 4 4 Frequency In 5 Adapter 1 6 Adapter 2 7 Adapter 3 8 Adapter 4 9 Adapter 5 10 Adapter 6 Configurable Process PI 0 1 Cur Lp Fdbk 10 RD S Tunable Process Pl 0 01 rad sec 1 00 rad sec 6 98 rad sec The OCL lead lag high break frequency is determined by the settings of this parameter and the OCL Leadlag Rato For example if the low break frequency is 0 50 rad sec and the ratio is 10 the high break frequency is 5 00 rad sec Nor FEEDBACK MAI CML FEEDBACK CML FEEDBACK SELECT 8 sample average d From I O Expansion Inputs Block Diagram ANALOG IN 25 ANALOG IN 13 LEADLAG LOW FREQ output of OCL enable logic OCL FEEDBACK LA To Outer Control Loop Block Diagram Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 92 Programming Parameters Process PI OCL LeadLag Ratio P 292 The ratio between the low break frequency and high break frequency of outer control loop lead lag The settings of this parameter and the OCL LeadLag Freq determine the high break frequency Refer to the OCL LeadLag Freq parameter and block diagram for additional information OCL LeadLag Type P 293 Selects the outer control loop as lead lag lag lead or bypassed If the OCL is configu
125. N 1FU 2FU 3FU TUTTO OTTO a BARA MA El MN UE x cH ee sei TEe H NU T07 HE 3 te 8 mE El peal al j eM _ Lu i ME SHA 2 d 281 282 283 d Lk UD de SS tees ra Met a mi SC ajo IN SY 0 O Em m i H A Jl N E wiel A A e o srann OO i La L MN Sl n lal p Tr om E L Si at L B ja M6 CONTROL GROUND STUD _ M6 CONTROL GROUND STUD BOTTOM VIEW Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 14 Installation Wiring Clearance Disconnect 24V Power Supply Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Table 2 A Chassis Ground Connections Hardware Size Tightening M5 18 lb in 2Nm M6 33 Ib in 3 7 Nm M8 100 bin 11 3 Nm M10 200 Ib in 23 Nm Lug with 14 10 AWG 35 Ib in 4 Nm Lug with 8 AWG 40 Ib in 4 5 Nm Lug with 6 4 AWG 45 Ib in 5 1 Nm Although the minimum clearance should be maintained for proper cooling this space may not always provide proper wiring clearance The minimum allowable wire bending radius may necessitate that extra space be provided to accommodate power wiring Consult the governing code for the proper wiring method NOTE You are responsible for completing the installation of the Drive system and to comply with all National and Local Electrical Codes The following information is to be used as a reference only damage exist if the Drive is not installed correctly The National Electrical Code NEC and local codes outline provisions
126. Numeric Text meter output 2 terminals 25 and 26 on the Parameter Range 0 Cur Lp Fdbk 11 Arm Volt regulator board 1 Cur Loop Ref 12 ATach Fdbk 2 Cur Loop Err 13 Encoder Fdbk 3 Spd Loop Fdbk 14 Zero 4 Spd Lp Ref 15 Full Scale 5 Spd Lp Error 16 Power Output 6 Spd Lp Out 17 OCL Ref 7 Spd Ramp Out 18 OCL Ramp Out 8 Spd Ramp In 19 OCL Feedback 9 Spd Src Out 20 OCL Output 10 Trim Output 21 Field Ref 22 Field Fdbk Note See Table A below for Full Scale Values Default Setting Spd Lp Fdbk Parameter Type Tunable Minimum Value 0 Cur Lp Feedback Maximum Value 22 Field Feedback Group Output Config Table A Source Signal Values Signal Selected Full Scale Value Cur Loop Fdbk P 006 Motor Arm Amps P 45 x Maximum Current P 40 Cur Loop Ref P 008 Cur Loop Error P 007 100 Full Scale Value Spd Loop Output P 024 Spd Loop Fdbk P 022 Top Speed Spd Loop Ref P 025 Spd Loop Error P 021 Spd Ramp Output P 028 Spd Ramp Input Tp P 027 Spd Sc Output P 026 Trim Output P 030 Analog Tach Fdbk P 194 Encoder Fdbk P 189 OCL Output P 018 Armature Voltage P 005 Motor Arm Volts Power Output Motor Arm Volts x Motor Arm Amps x Maximum Current 100 Fld Reference P 280 Motor Field Amps Field Feedback P 010 OCL Reference TP P 020 4095 OCL Ramp Output P 019 OCL Feedback P 017 Pub
127. OTOR FIELD KIT UM C SEE CONNECTION KIT LN OR SALES ORDER W D EE DC MOTOR ARMATURE CONNECTION 45 O O A1 E o 0 a GRD eat ke Lolo 9 LES LJ ne q q o o o e al al ALDO 1 1 p FAN n a a e FRONT VIEW OF DRIVE WITHOUT DISCONNECT Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 28 Installation Figure 2 19 DC Motor Field and Armature Connection Locations 100 150 HP at 230 VAC 200 300 HP at 460 VAC 45 Al DC MOTOR ARMATURE CONNECTION OA s ao OT E b y o 8 o o o D e tama o cm n ob res leo o e e l 8 Fie e o o B E 4 V 29 Aur o AL Allen Bradley 6 6 6 i EH m p EK ZEE een e e xl D A Oef e umm f WS Cu x w 1 a tr ESN F a Me D e O FRONT SIDE b E E 123 4F1F2
128. Owner P 208 MOP Owner P 202 Local Owner P 221 Ready Running Command Dir Actual Dir Accelerating Decelerating Alarm Fault At Speed Local ID Local ID Local ID Ref ID RefID ___ 0000 Ext Ref 1 Ref ID 0001 Preset 1 Ref ID 0010 Preset 2 0011 Preset 3 0100 N A 0101 N A 0110 N A 0111 N A 1000 Ext ref 2 1001 Port 1 ref 1010 Port 2 ref 1011 Port 3 ref 1100 Port 4 ref 1101 Port 5 ref 1110 Port 6 ref 1111 Int Jog ref Configuring the SCANport Controls Using SCANport Capabilities D 3 SCANport consists of two parts control and analog I O The SCANport controls are functions that control the motor such as start stop and jog The control can come from up to six SCANport devices and one Terminal Board simultaneously The control is based on an ownership mechanism that allows certain functions to have only one owner and other functions to have multiple owners Control of these functions Any device can control can come from only one device these functions Speed reference Run Stop Direction Jog Clear Fault Local MOP Ownership is determined when a SCANport device commands a function As long as that function is commanded that device is the owner of that function For Example If device 1 is commanding a forward direction which is a one owner function no other device can change the direction until device 1 stops commanding the for
129. P 068 ANALOG IN 3 O P 070 From VO ANALOG IN 4 To CML Exp Inputs O O Reference Block Diagram FREQUENCY IN a Block Diagram From SCANport ADARTON IS O Arm Voltage P 004 Armature Spd a Voltage SOFTWARE SCALING Internal CUR LOOP FDBK 8 sample average SOFTWARE SCALING IR Compensation P 066 AnlgTach AnlgTach Anlg Tach IR Comp TP P 179 V 1000 Gain Zero P047 Een P 058 ARM VOLT gee Spd Lead Lag Type DC TACH Q em ANLG TACH O LEAD LAG d gun SOFTWARE SCALING ANLG TACH FDBK AC TACH or Q e d S O LAG LEAD LAG LEAD O Max Motor Speed ee P 041 Encoder Fdbk Pulse P 189 SPD SPD Tachometer SOFTWARE SCALING LEAD LAG LEAD LAG From optional FREQ RATIO pulse tach kit Encoder Encoder Quad PPR P 049 P 048 Default Selection Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 A 8 Firmware Block Diagrams Figure A 8 Current Minor Loop Reference Positive current limit from Speed Loop Block Diagram J15 Reg Cur Torque Reference Type L From Speed Trim d P 031 P 182 Ret Reference Select Block Diagram GE P 008 To Current From SPEED VOLTAGE RATELIM Minor Loop Speed Loop Block Diagram Block Diagram f dd g Spd Loop Output ACC DEC P 024 Maximum Current Normal Inertia P 040 P 109 Cur Loop Ratelim i C Se P 064 inertia Comp Rel r S guf SE p 122 REGISTER Inertia Negative current limit from p S Comp Speed Loop
130. PM FLA Min Pro Spd Max Pro Spd 250 Tunable Reference Set 88 Preset Speed 2 RPM FLA Min Pro Spd Max Pro Spd 250 Tunable Reference Set 89 Preset Speed 3 RPM FLA Min Pro Spd Max Pro Spd 250 Tunable Reference Set 90 Ref 1 Source Enum 0 14 0 Tunable Reference Set 91 Ref 2 Source Enum 0 14 1 Tunable Reference Set 92 Jog Acc Dec Time Seconds 0 10 300 3 0 Tunable Reference Set 93 Jog Reference RPM 0 Max Pro Spd 250 Tunable Reference Set 94 Jog Off Dly Time Seconds 0 10 1 Configurable Reference Set 95 REF SETUP 2 Hidden FUTURE USE Reference Set 96 REF SETUP 3 Hidden FUTURE USE Reference Set 97 REF SETUP 4 Hidden FUTURE USE Reference Set 98 REF SETUP 5 Hidden FUTURE USE Reference Set 99 Min Speed Bypass Numeric 0 Off 1 On 0 Off Tunable Feature Select 100 Ref Ramp Bypass Numeric 0 Off 1 On 0 Off Tunable Feature Select 101 Current Compound 96 50 50 0 Tunable Feature Select 102 Inertia Comp Src Enum 0 10 0 Tunable Feature Select 103 Monitor 1 Delay Seconds 0 300 1 0 Tunable Feature Select 104 Monitor 1 Source Selection 0 4 1 Configurable Feature Select 105 Monitor 1 Level 1 0 100 10 Tunable Feature Select 106 Monitor 2 Delay Seconds 0 30 0 1 0 Tunable Feature Select 107 Monitor 2 Source Selection 0 4 3 Tunable Feature Select 108 Monitor 2 Level 0 1 100 10 Tunable Feature Select 109 Normal Inertia Seconds 0 05 65 20 1 00 Tunable Feature Select 110 Reverse Disable Off 1 On 0 Off Configurable Feature Select 111 S Curve Roundin
131. Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Tunable Field 0 60 100 overvoltage condition Set Motor Fld Amps to the motor s nameplate ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause a motor value Make sure Field Economy Ref and or Field Ref P 280 is set greater than Field Loss Level P 277 to avoid field loss faults Failure to Observe this precaution can result in bodily injury and damage to the equipment Fld Lp Lead Freq P 278 Only used if the Field Current Regulator Kit is Display Drive Units RD S installed Parameter Type Tunable Lead frequency for the field current PI block Group Field Minimum Value 0 Factory Default 10 0 Maximum Value 282 7 FldLoopKp Fid Lp Lead Freq Field Reference TP FIELD DELTA FIELD To Field Current Regulator PHASE BSc Control Block Diagram FIRING LOGIC SUPPLY FIELD FEEDBACK FIELD DELTA HIGH LIM To Field Current Regulator Control Block Diagram Fld Loop Kp P 279 Only available if the Field Current Regulator kit is installed Proportional gain setting for the field current PI block Refer to the Field Control Loop Fig A 10 block diagram for additional information Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Tunable Field 0 01 0 30 128 0 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 90 Programming Parameters Fiel
132. Programming Parameters 5 63 DIAGNOSTICS Open SCR Trip Pt P 168 Open SCR trip threshold Extremely unusual load conditions or severe current loop instability can cause nuisance open SCR faults Increasing this input will increase the tolerance of such disturbances Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Tunable Diagnostics 800 800 4000 Phase Tst Delta P 169 FACTORY TEST PARAMETER NOT FOR CUSTOMER USE The test firing conduction angle of the SCRs If equal to 0 the armature power bridge is off If it is set to 180 the armature power bridge is fully on Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Degree Tunable Diagnostics 0 0 180 ATTENTION The armature phase fire test is unregulated To prevent excess motor speed either disconnect the armature leads from the drive and replace with a similar load or disconnect the field leads from the drive Lock the motor armature shaft securely to prevent rotation in either direction prior to selecting this test Phase Tst Bridge P 170 FACTORY TEST PARAMETER NOT FOR CUSTOMER USE Selects which armature bridge forward or reverse is used during the phase fire test This input can only be changed while the drive is stopped OFF selects the forward bridge A1 positive with respect to A2 ON selects the reverse bridge A1 negative with respect t
133. Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Unitse Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value uSEC Tunable Advanced Setup 2 2 1000 RD S Tunable Advanced Setup 100 1 3490 Tunable Advanced Setup 2 2 20 Numeric Text 0 Lead Lag 1 Bypass 2 Lag Lead Tunable Advanced Setup 1 0 2 Programming Parameters 5 33 ADV SETUP Spd Lp Lag Freq P 075 Lag break frequency for the lag block If Spd Lp Lag Type is set to Bypass this parameter has no effect Spd Lp Lag Type P 076 Determines if the lead lag block will act upon the speed loop feedback signal If On the lead lag block is bypassed and the feedback signal is used directly by the speed loop summing junction Spd Lp Lead Freq P 077 Speed loop PI block lead frequency A setting of 0 00 allows proportional only speed loop control Spd Loop Kp P 078 Speed loop PI block proportional gain Refer to Fig A 7 Speed Loop Block Diagram for more information Tach Loss Angle P 079 Allows setting of Armature Delta firing angle before a Tach Loss fault will be gene
134. Ref 12 ATach Fdbk board When the analog output is at its 2 Cur Loop Err 13 Encoder Fdbk maximum value the selected signal is at its 3 Spd Loop Fdbk 14 Zero full scale value 4 Spd Lp Ref 15 Full Scale 5 Spd Lp Error 16 Power Output 6 Spd Lp Out 17 OCL Ref 7 Spd Ramp Out 18 OCL Ramp Out 8 Spd Ramp In 19 OCL Feedback 9 Spd Src Out 20 OCL Output 10 Trim Output 21 Field Ref 22 Field Fdbk See Table A below for Full Scale Values Parameter Type Configurable Group Output Config Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 22 Refer also to Parameters Maximum Current P 040 Motor Field Amps P 044 Motor Arm Amps P 045 Motor Arm Volts P 046 Max Motor Speed P 041 Table A Source Signal Values Signal Selected Full Scale Value Cur Loop Fdbk P 006 Motor Arm Amps P 45 x Maximum Current P 40 Cur Loop Ref P 008 100 Full Scale Value Cur Loop Error P 007 Spd Loop Output P 024 Spd Loop Fdbk P 022 Top Speed Spd Loop Ref P 025 Spd Loop Error P 021 Spd Ramp Output P 028 Spd Ramp In TP P 027 Spd Src Output P 026 Trim Output P 030 Analog Tach Fdbk P 194 Encoder Fdbk P 189 OCL Output P 018 Armature Voltage P 005 Motor Arm Volts Power Output Motor Arm Volts x Motor Arm Amps x Maximum Current 100 Fld Reference P 280 Field F
135. Running Bit 2 Command Dir Bit 3 Actual Dir Bit 4 Accelerating Logic Evaluation Bit 5 Decelerating SCANport 4 Block Bit 6 Alarm Bit 7 Fault SCANport 3 SCANport 5 Bit 8 At Speed Bit 9 Local ID i Bit11 LocalID Sequencing Geer ne Bit13 RefID Terminal Block Bit14 RefID Bit15 Beil Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 D 2 Using SCANport Capabilities SCANport 1 SCANport 2 SCANport 3 SCANport 4 SCANport 5 SCANport 6 Terminal Board Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 You can attach any combination of Human Interface Modules HIMs Graphic Programming Terminals GPTs and or SCANport gateway communications modules to any of the six SCANports You can access ports 1 and 2 directly from the regulator board To access ports 3 4 and 5 you need to plug a Port Expander into port 2 Normally port 1 is connected to a HIM The terminal block is always present On the 1397 Drive there is no direct access to Port 6 However an adapter identified as 6 will still be scanned Figure D 2 shows the parameter interactions involved with Logic Status Figure D 2 Parameter Interactions Logic Mask P 207 Logic Status Parameter 190 Run Mask P 201 Jog Mask P 203 Fit Res Mask P 205 Reference Mask P 204 MOP Mask P 206 Local Mode P 208 Direction Mask P 202 Stop Owner P 214 Run Owner P 215 Direction Owner P 205 Jog Owner P 204 Reference Owner P 206 Flt Reset
136. S 1 SCALE 1 00 191 Drive Status 0 249 PROCESS 1 TEXT 1 86 192 AC Line Period 0 250 PROCESS 1 TEXT2 111 193 AC Line Voltage 0 251 PROCESS 1 TEXT 3 108 194 Analog Tach Fdbk 0 252 PROCESS 1 TEXT 4 116 195 Exp I O Dig In 0 253 PROCESS 1 TEXT 5 115 196 Fault Reset 0 254 PROCESS 1 TEXT 6 32 197 Alarm Reset 0 255 PROCESS 1 TEXT 7 32 198 CPU Loading 0 256 PROCESS 1 TEXT8 32 199 Not Ready Cause 0 200 SCANport Errors 0 257 PROCESS 2 PAR 6 201 Run Mask 127 258 PROCESS 2 SCALE 1 00 202 Direction Mask 126 259 PROCESS 2 TEXT 1 65 203 Jog Mask 127 260 PROCESS 2 TEXT 2 109 204 Reference Mask 127 261 PROCESS 2 TEXT 3 112 205 Fault Reset Mask 127 262 PROCESS 2 TEXT 4 115 206 MOP Mask 127 263 PROCESS 2 TEXT 5 32 207 Logic Mask 127 264 PROCESS 2 TEXT 6 32 208 Local Mask 127 265 PROCESS 2 TEXT 7 32 215 Run Owner 272 E Fld Volts Adj 84 216 Direction Owner 273 Fld Econ Delay 5 217 Jog Owner 275 Fld Auto Weak 1 CO OO O O OOOO 218 Reference Owner Fld Delta Hi Lim 130 219 Fit Reset Owner Fld Loss Level 60 220 MOP Owner Fld Lp Lead Freq 1 0 221 Local Owner Fld Loop Kp 0 30 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 D 16 Using SCANport Capabilities No Name Default Value No Name Default Value 280 Field Reference 4095 295 OCL Lead Freq 1 00 281 FLD Loop K Fdbk 1 00 296 OCL Pos Limit 100 282 Fld Weak Ld Freq 0 30
137. TER FIELD CONDUIT CONDUIT Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 CE Conformity B 15 Figure B 11 Typical 1397 Wiring Diagram for EMC Compliance with Dynamic Braking Kit installed AC POWER DYNAMIC BRAKING EXPANDED METAL ENTRY RESISTOR ENCLOSURE ale i INVERTING m FAULT WE Beete I PREAKER CONTACTOR 1 bobos ENCLOSURE DDI IQ O CO DISCONNECT C EQ UU st Fi F2 A1 1397 Drive AC MAINS FILTER REGULATOR BOARD TERMINALS u m HEEL ELE DEL ELLE ERAS ROBO Ee 1 EE E LIILITITLITTILIITPULECUTITTIT 3 i E REGULATOR BOARD CONVENIENCE TERMINALS ET E EN jme AC MAINS INDUCTOR H BRAIDED STRAP BRAIDED STRAP SEH FROM ENCLOSURE oe CONTROL SKIN AND DOOR DC MOTOR i CONDUIT TO GROUND BAR ARMATURE AND TACHOMETER FIELD CONDUIT CONDUIT Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 B 16 CE Conformity End of Appendix Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 High Ambient Temperature Conditions HP Rating 5 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 Appendix C Derating The watts loss values provided in Table C A is based on 40 degree C ambient and allow a 15 degree rise to 55 degree C internal If your application conditions require the enclosure to be mounted in a higher than 40 degree C ambient temperature use Table C B to derate the cabinet heat
138. W Reference Set 0 0 14 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 36 Programming Parameters REFERENCE SET Ref 2 Source P 091 Selects the source of external reference 2 Jog Acc Dec Time P 092 Sets the time it takes the jog reference circuit to reach Jog Reference P 093 from zero Smaller changes in speed take proportionally less time The S Curve Rounding parameter does not affect the setting of this parameter Jog Reference P 093 The normal operating speed while the drive is jogging Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Anlg In 1 1 Speed Pot 2 MOP Output 3 Anlg In 3 4 Anlg In 4 5 Frequency In 6 Adapter 1 7 Adapter 2 8 Adapter 3 9 Adapter 4 10 Adapter 5 11 Adapter 6 12 Preset 1 13 Preset 2 14 Preset 3 R amp W Reference Set 1 0 14 SEC Tunable Reference Set 3 0 0 1 300 0 RPM Tunable Reference Set 250 0 Max Process Speed this parameter is set to zero The user is responsible for assuring safe ATTENTION This drive can operate at and maintain zero speed when conditions for operating
139. able Adv Setup 63 Cur Loop Kp 0 000 4 000 0 250 Tunable Adv Setup 64 Cur Loop Rate Lim ms 1 100 40 Tunable Adv Setup 65 METERING 5 Hidden FUTURE USE Adv Setup 66 IR Compensation FLA 0 50 0 Tunable Adv Setup 67 Pos Cur Lim FLA 0 150 150 Tunable Adv Setup 68 Neg Cur Lim FLA 0 150 150 Tunable Adv Setup 69 Pos Cur Lim Src ENUM 0 9 O Register Configurable Adv Setup 70 Neg Cur Lim Src ENUM 0 9 O Register Configurable Adv Setup 71 PLL Max Error uSEC 2 1000 1 00 Tunable Adv Setup 72 Spd Lead Lag Freq rad sec 1 3490 100 Tunable Adv Setup 73 Spd Lead Lag Rato ratio 2 20 2 Tunable Adv Setup 74 Spd Lead Lag Type selection O Lead Lg 2 Lag Lead 1 Bypass Tunable Adv Setup 75 Spd Lp Lag Freq rad sec 0 01 69 81 1 00 Tunable Adv Setup 76 Spd Lp Lag Type selection 0 1 1 Tunable Adv Setup 77 Spd Lp Lead Freq rad sec 0 00 141 37 3 00 Tunable Adv Setup 78 Spd Loop Kp 0 10 128 0 4 40 Tunable Adv Setup Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 8 Programming Parameters PARM NAME UNITS MIN MAX DEFAULT TYPE FUNCTION 79 ADV SETUP 1 Hidden FUTURE USE Reference Set 80 ADV SETUP 2 Hidden FUTURE USE Reference Set 81 ADV SETUP 3 Hidden FUTURE USE Reference Set 82 ADV SETUP 4 Hidden FUTURE USE Reference Set 83 ADV SETUP 5 Hidden FUTURE USE Reference Set 84 MOP Accel Time Seconds 1 0 300 0 1 Tunable Reference Set 85 MOP Decel Time Seconds 1 0 300 0 1 Tunable Reference Set 86 MOP Reset Enable 0 1 0 Tunable Reference Set 87 Preset Speed 1 R
140. adjust the value to the nominal value of the Setup Group AC line RMS voltage in use Valid values are 200 575 VAC CT Turns Ratio P 036 NA The Drive Current Transformer Turns Ratio TP Tn see page 5 22 for Adv Setup instructions on determining a CT Turns final default value Jog Acc Dec Time P 092 3 0 Jog Accel Decel Time is the time it takes the jog reference circuit to Ref Setup Group Seconds reach Max Motor Speed from zero Jog Reference P 093 250 RPM The operating speed when the Drive is jogging Ref Setup Group NOTES Default levels may change based on incoming Voltage levels Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 20 Start Up and Adjustment Jumper Settings Hardware Jumper The jumper settings for the 1397 Drive determine the regulator type program protection field settings references for automatic and manual modes tachometer voltage range and armature feedback scaling IMPORTANT The Diagnostic Parameter group in the 1397 will display the proper jumper configuration you should use for J11 J14 and J18 based on the parameters you have previously entered e Through the HIM check the proper jumper settings for J11 Tach VScale P 180 J14 Tach V Range P 181 and J18 Arm Fdbk Res P 183 in the Diagnostics Menu Write down the as displayed settings in the Calculated Setting column of Table 4 G and in Table 4 F below Make sure the actual settings match Table 4 F Regu
141. ange Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric 200 to 200 Tunable Input Config 0 200 200 Numeric Input Config Tunable 1 000 0 750 2 250 Numeric 0 0 10V 1 10V 2 4 20mA 3 10 50mA 10V Input Config 1 0 3 Programming Parameters 5 49 INPUT CONFIG Anlg In 3 Zero P 134 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Adjusts the zero point of analog input 3 terminals 50 and 51 on the I O expansion board to remove any offset that might exist on the input Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Tunable Input Config 0 200 200 To adjust the zero point make small changes to this parameter until Anlg In 3 P 003 equals zero when the signal at terminals 50 and 51 is at its minimum 0 V Anlg In 4 Gain P 135 Only used if I O Expansion Kit Installed Scales Analog Input 4 Terminals 52 amp 53 Anlg In 4 Zero P 136 Only used if the I O Expansion Kit is installed Adjusts the zero point of Analog Input 4 52 53 on the I O Expansion Brd to remove any offset that may exist on the input Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Fact
142. apter 6 Masks 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 0000000001111111 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read amp Write Masks 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 Reference Mask P 204 This parameter controls which adapters can select an alternate reference Fault Reset Mask P 205 This parameter controls which adapters can reset a fault condition MOP Mask P 206 This parameter controls which adapters can issue MOP commands to the drive Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Programming Parameters 5 73 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read amp Write Masks 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 0000000001111111 Read amp Write Masks 000000000000000 0000000001111111 0000000001111111 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Masks 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 0000000001111111 Publication 1397
143. aracter one bit to the left That bit can then be be changed by pressing the Increment Decrement keys Masks Logic Mask Terminal Blk lalalala bt Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 3 8 Programming Terminal Process Mode WM WM WM WM ra pa or MM SEL 1 When selected the Process mode will show a custom display consisting of information programmed with the Process Display group of parameters A Follow steps A C on the preceding page to access the Program mode B Press the Increment Decrement key until Process Display is shown Press Enter C Using the Increment Decrement keys select Process 1 Par and enter the number of the parameter you wish to monitor Press Enter D Select Process 1 Scale using the Increment Decrement keys Enter the desired scaling factor Press Enter E Select Process 1 Txt 1 using the Increment Decrement keys Enter the desired text character Press Enter and repeat for the remaining characters F If desired a second display line can also be programmed by repeating steps A E for Process 2 xxx parameters G When process programming is com plete press ESCape until Choose Mode is displayed Press Increment Decrement until Process is displayed H Press Enter This selects which custom display will be on line 1 and line 2 Use the Increment Decrement keys to select process 1 or 2 parameters for line 1 I Press SELect to mov
144. be shown on line 2 of the display Process 2 Text 8 P 266 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 2 Par and Process 2 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 2 of the display Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 32 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 32 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 32 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 32 127 Programming Parameters 5 87 E Fld Volts Adj P 272 Only used if enhanced field supply option is installed Adjusts the field output voltage Fld Econ Delay P 273 After the motor stops the drive maintains full field for Field Econ Delay minutes before entering field economy When the motor starts again the drive immediately returns to full field Field Econ Delay has no effect o
145. bility a value greater than 25 may be used IMPORTANT Prior to performing the autotune the application parameters whose values were previously lowered Max Process Speed P 042 Negative Current Lim P 068 Pos Cur Lim Src P 069 Pos Cur Lim P 067 must be programmed for their final value Record the final values in Table 4 K Start Up and Adjustment 4 37 Table 4 K Application Parameters Parameter Name Par No Default Description Final Setting Max Process Spd P 042 500 RPM The maximum speed of the drive that can be supported by the application Setup Group or process Pos Current Lim P 067 150 Selects the highest amount of current motor rated armature amps for Adv Setup Group FLA the forward bridge This parameter is also a high limit for the speed loop PI block output Neg Current Lim P 068 150 This parameter is only set for regenerative Drives For non regenerative Adv Setup Group FLA Drives it is automatically set to zero and cannot be changed This input is also clamped to zero if Feedback Type is set to AC Tach or if Feedback Type is set to Pulse Tach and Encoder Quad is Off Neg Current Lim selects the highest amount of current motor rated armature amps for the reverse bridge This parameter is also used as a low limit for the Speed Loop PI block output Pos Current Lim P 069 0 This parameter selects the source for the positive current limit If register Src Adv Setup Group
146. bility is less than that calculated by current loop tuning Use 75 or greater 074 084 ST Fatal Fault An autotuning fault occurred with self tuning unable to Attempt to rerun autotune routine or complete its routine tune manually to bypass the problem Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 6 6 Troubleshooting Fault No Fault Name Description Action 085 Main Contactor The main FN contactor did not open following a run or jog Possible causes include e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged FN FN AUX Dynamic Braking or Auxiliary Dynamic Braking wiring e FN FN AUX DB or DB AUX contactor malfunction Check all wiring and connections to e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged main the dynamic brake and dynamic brake contactor or dynamic braking control wiring MCR or contacts Repair or replace as DBCR necessary 086 Power Failure The power supply input voltage momentarily went below Check J7 ribbon cable and power tolerance Possible causes include supply input wiring repair or replace e AC line voltage dip 20 tolerance as necessary If AC line voltage dips e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged J7 ribbon are occuring regularly an isolation cable or power supply input wiring transformer or line reactor may be required 087 NVM Checksum FIt e EEPROM Checksum invalid e Restore factory defaults e Save to EEPROM e Clear fault queue Re
147. c P 155 Only available if the I O Expansion Kit is installed Selects the signal that drives digital output 1 terminals 66 and 67 on the I O Expansion board Dig Out 1 Type P 156 Only used if the I O Expansion Kit is installed Selects whether digital output 1 terminals 66 and 67 on I O Expansion board is normally open or normally closed Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Monitor 1 Out 1 Monitor 2 Out 2 In Current Limit 3 Drive Ready Configurable Output Config 0 Monitor 1 Out 0 Monitor 1 Out 3 Drive Ready ATTENTION This output is intended for use as an indication DO NOT use this as a control source If itis used as a control source a dangerous condition can result Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Normal Open 1 Normal Closed Configurable Output Configuration 0 Normal Open 0 Normal Open 1 Normal Closed A ATTENTION On a power cycle or reset the contact is held at normally open until the drive software is initialized Make sure that this condition does not result in a dangerous situation for your application Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe bodil
148. cation 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value AMPS Tunable Field 0 00 0 00 128 0 Tunable Field 0 90 1 00 1 100 RD S Tunable Field 0 00 rad sec 0 30 rad sec 282 7 rad sec Tunable Field 0 10 0 80 128 00 VOLT Tunable Field 0 228 4095 4095 corresponds to MOTOR RATED ARM VOLTS Programming Parameters 5 91 Process Pl OCL Fdbk Source P 290 Selects whether the outer control loop OCL feedback signal is obtained from an I O Expansion kit analog input or from an eight sample average of the current minor loop CML feedback signal Selecting Cur Lp Fdbk allows an outer current loop to be implemented OCL LeadLag Freq P 291 Lead lag low break frequency of the outer control loop Sets the lead break frequency if OCL LeadLag Type is set to Lead Lag Sets the lag break frequency if OCL LeadLag Type is set to Lag Lead Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default
149. ce ramp block can be bypassed by setting OCL RAMP TIME to 0 0 Indicates default selection Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 A 6 Firmware Block Diagrams Figure A 6 Speed Reference Mode Select OCL Output P 018 From Outer Control Loop Block Diagram Max Motor Speed P 041 Spd Ramp Output P 028 Jogging Active Current Limit Stop Command From Speed Reference Ramp Block Diagram To Speed Loop Block Diagram A7 Cur Compound TP P 173 CML FEEDBACK 8 sample average Software Scaling Spd Loop Ref P 025 Current Compound P 101 MAX Motor Speed OFF P 041 0 Jog Ramp Output P 12 Jog Reference ON P 093 Jog Command RATELIM Forward Reverse Command Jog Acc Dec Time P 092 Indicates default selection Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Firmware Block Diagrams A 7 Figure A 7 Speed Loop Pos Current Lim REGISTER O id P 067 ANALOGIN3 P 069 From I O To CML Exp Inputs ANALOG IN 4 0 O Reference Block Diagram FREQUENCY IN O Block Diagram From SCANport ADAPTOR 1 6 O Spd Lag F P BE SC Spd Loop Kp Pus P 078 Spd Loop Ref Spd Loop Error P 078 From Speed P 025 P 021 WLG P Por Spd Loop Output Reference Q OFF KP H P 024 LAG To CML kode select x PI Reference i ON Block Diagram O Block Diagram Spd Loop Lag Out WLD LO P 023 Spd Lp REGISTER Neg Ci ge Neg Cur Lim ped P 077
150. ctor will automatically open after a ramp stop or current limit stop is asserted This value should be less than or equal to Min Process Speed Stop Mode default is Coast If you wish to change modes exit the Set Up menu and select Stop Mode Change the default to Ramp or Limit and then set the Stop Speed Level in parameter 116 Max Motor Speed P 041 500 RPM Max Motor Speed is the highest normal running speed of the motor Setup Group This parameter scales the feedback device Max Motor Speed depends on several factors e f there is no field weakening the top speed is typically the same as the nameplate base speed e f there is field weakening the top speed is the same as the field weak ened speed Top speed is typically more than the base speed when field weakening is applied Motor Arm Amps P 045 8 0 Amps Setup Group ATTENTION The Drive will not operate properly if A this parameter value is wrong This parameter must be equal to the rated armature amps on the motor nameplate Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment The rated armature current from the motor nameplate Motor Field Amps P 044 0 01 It only needs to be set if a regulated field supply is installed Sets the Setup Group Amps motor rated hot field amps from the motor nameplate Scales the field current feedback Motor Arm Volts P 046 240 The rated armature voltage from the motor nameplate Setup Gr
151. d Reference P 280 Only used if the Field Current Regulator kit is installed Current reference for the field control loop field This is the field current reference when the drive is not in field economy Refer to the Motor Field Amps block diagram for additional information Fld Loop K Fdbk P 281 Only used if the Field Current Regulator kit is installed Gain adjustment for the field feedback Refer to the Motor Field Amps block diagram for additional information In most cases this will be set for unity gain typically 1 000 Fld Weak Ld Freq P 282 Only used if the Field Current Regulator kit is installed PI block lead frequency of the field control loop s armature voltage regulator Refer to the Field Auto Weak block diagram for additional information Fld Weaken Kp P 283 Only used if the Field Current Regulator kit is installed The proportional gain of the field control loop s armature voltage regulator Refer to the Field Auto Weak block diagram for additional information Fld Weaken Level P 284 Only available if the Field Current Regulator kit is installed Sets the point at which the field control loop begins regulating armature voltage and the field begins to weaken If IR compensation is used the threshold is Fld Weaken Level less IR Compensation at rated armature current Refer to the Field Auto Weak block diagram for additional information Publi
152. d at full capacity Precautions should be taken not to exceed the maximum inlet ambient air temperature of 55 C 131 F If the Drive is in an enclosed cabinet air circulation fans or a closed circuit heat exchanger may be required For information on installing wiring and grounding Line Filters used in CE compliant applications refer to Appendix B For installation information on AC Line Inductors used in CE compliant applications refer to Appendix B Installation 2 3 Figure 2 1 Enclosure Mounting Minimum Clearances e x FEN SI e N fo amp 9j Wei Jelena U l yu el leleTlel e el al e e 9 lo e e e e e e a A Allen Bradley C Allen Bradley B 4 CIOENDE s ES Yala ao dnd x eJ 4 eJ Approved Mounting Methods All Dimensions Millimeters and Inches Enclosure Mounting Clearances 1 5 30 HP 230VAC 3 60 HP O 460VAC 7 110A 380 415 VAC A Leftside Clearance B Rightside Clearance C Drive to Drive Side Clearance D Bottom Clearance E Top Clearance 127 mm 5 in Y
153. d for compliance These instructions are in addition to the normal installation instructions IMPORTANT This appendix is not applicable to 1397 drives rated above 300HP 9460 VAC These higher horsepower drives are not designed to be CE compliant For the 1397 Drive to conform to the standards listed on the Declaration of Conformity DOC above the Drive must e Be accompanied by the DOC for that Drive e Be specified by model number on the DOC e Have a CE mark which is below the Drive nameplate e Be mounted and wired on the conductive non coated back panel of an electrical cabinet Include an AC Line filter and inductor as specified in this Appendix e Be installed according to the instructions in this Appendix e Be operated with the electrical cabinet doors closed NOTE Conformity of the 1397 Drive does not guarantee that the entire installation will be in conformance In addition to the Drive you will need the following to install the 1397 for CE compliance e Electrical cabinet with back mounting panel e AC Line filter e AC Line inductor Mounting Panel and Electrical Cabinet Selection The 1397 Drive AC Line filter AC Line inductor and any other electronic or electrical equipment must be mounted in an electrical cabinet The back mounting panel where this equipment is mounted must have a good electrically conductive surface such as aluminized cold roll steel Galvalume or galvanized steel It must be free of a
154. derstand the hazard SETUP 36 CT Turns Ratio pg 5 22 37 Accel Time pg 5 22 38 Decel Time pg 5 23 39 Feedback Type pg 5 23 40 Maximum Current pg 5 23 41 Max Motor Speed pg 5 23 42 Max Process Spd pg 5 24 43 Min Process Spd pg 5 24 44 Motor Field Amps pg 5 25 45 Motor Arm Amps pg 5 25 46 Motor Arm Volts pg 5 26 47 AnlgTach v 1000 pg 5 26 48 Encoder PPR pg 5 26 49 Encoder Quad pg 5 27 50 Nominal AC Freq pg 5 27 51 Nominal AC Volts pg 5 27 52 Autotune Type pg 5 27 ADV SETUP 57 Anlg Tach Gain pg 5 28 58 Anlg Tach Zero pg 5 28 59 Arm Voltage Gain pg 5 28 60 Arm Voltage Zero pg 5 29 61 Cur Loop K Fdbk pg 5 29 62 Cur Lp Lead Freq pg 5 29 63 Cur Loop Kp pg 5 29 64 Cur Loop RateLim pg 5 30 66 IR Compensation pg 5 30 67 Pos Current Lim pg 5 30 68 Neg Current Lim pg 5 30 69 Pos Cur Lim Src pg 5 31 70 Neg Cur Lim Src pg 5 31 71 PLL Max Error pg 5 32 72 Spd LeadLag Freq pg 5 32 73 Spd LeadLag Rato pg 5 32 74 Spd LeadLag Type pg 5 32 75 Spd Lp Lag Freq pg 5 33 76 Spd Lp Lag Type pg 5 33 77 Spd Lp Lead Freq pg 5 33 78 Spd Loop Kp pg 5 33 79 Tach Loss Angle pg 5 33 LA EX cel pl Parameter Groups REFERENCE SET 84 MOP Accel Time pg 5 34 85 MOP Decel Time pg 5 34 86 MOP Reset Enable pg 5 34 87 Preset Speed 1 pg 5 35 88 Preset Speed 2 pg 5 35 89 Preset Speed 3 pg 5 35 90 Ref 1 Source pg 5 35 91 Re
155. e Ee EE 1 7 A sea EE EE TERES 1 8 Analog Ouipuls 1i ise repre REPRE RERE REPE REFER dG eens 1 8 Drive Description ca ose sopa rre ERE RE EQUO RE FH exXERTS 1 9 Po PT ETT 1 10 Chapter 2 Chapter Objectives 2 1 EMVINONMICN ses Caitea Feed bx UE RE RREPCLEERE PE iue 2 1 MIMI ooa ue qu TUR ETHER barco EROUE E REDE ET ER te 2 1 Cooling AIMOW neas tone ee wage raros ii 2 2 Line Filters CE Only uiu eme s ker kr REA pk Ree S 2 2 AC Line Inductors CE Only cesse seesi s re ER Seow vues 2 2 Enclosure Mounting Minimum Clearances 2 3 Enclosure Mounting Dimensions 2 4 Grounding Procedures neesu 2 8 Wiring Clearance ues esr ununa 2 14 bo EE 2 14 24V Power Supply EE 2 14 Wire Size Type Casse 2 15 Motor Installation 2 ee baos e taf ista ca rien Sea Reese sa 2 17 Power Wiring Procedure llle 2 17 AC Line Torque Recommendations 2 24 Recommended AC Line and DC Armature Fuses 2 25 Control Connections Z deer E irte tas ori 2 30 Control Wiring Procedure 0 cee eee eee eee 2 31 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 ii Table of Contents Programming Terminal Start Up and Adjustment Programming Parameters Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Chapter 3 General A O 3 1 HIM Description EE 3 1 HIM Operation EE 3 5 HIM Programming Steps 3 6 HIM Programming Modes 4s cur rru E RE RR RE CERE EIES 3 7 Program and Display Modes lt ooo ooo eee ee
156. e field control loop regulates armature voltage Armature Voltage and Fld Weaken Level try to maintain a zero input to the first PI block If armature voltage increases a negative value is input to the PI block This results in a lower current input into the next PI block This in turn lowers the armature voltage lowering the input to the first PI block so that it is closer to zero The field control loop only affects armature voltage control if a tachometer is used and if Field Auto Weak is set to Enabled Fld Loop Kp From Field Block Diagram From Field Block Diagram Fld Weaken Kp Fld Delta Hi Lim P 276 High limit of the field current PI block See Field Auto Weak for block diagram Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 o Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Fid Lp Lead Freq FIELD DELTA Fid Weak Ld Freq Field Phase Field Regulator Supply Firing Logic Fld Auto Weak Degrees Configurable Field 0 130 180 Programming Parameters 5 89 Fld Loss Level P 277 Only used if the Field Current Regulator Kit is installed The value that is compared to Field Feedback to check for field loss Fld Loss Level is set as a percentage of Motor Field Amps It is usually set to 85 of the motor nameplate value of field weaken Refer to Field Econ Ref for additional information Display Drive Units
157. e of an oscilliscope and other test equipment The oscilliscope chassis may be at potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilliscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilliscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilliscope be used in the A minus B Quasi differential mode with the oscilliscope chassis grounded to an earth ground Refer to equipment safety instructions for all test equipment before using with the 1397 ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 2 Start Up and Adjustment Required Tools amp Equipment Recommended Tools amp Equipment General Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with A the 1397 DC Drive and its associated machinery should plan and implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the Drive Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage The following equipment is required for start up and tuning e Multimeter capable of 1000V DC 750V AC with input resistance of at least 1 megohm e Test leads for multimeter e Assorted screwdrivers Phillips and blade and a set of open end wrenches e Clamp on Ammeter AC and DC with current ratings to match Drive ratings e Programming Terminal HIM or GPT The following equipment is recommended for start up and tuning e D
158. e proceeding Drives without AC Line Disconnect Apply the main power source feeding the Drive and measure the voltage present between terminals L1 and L2 181 182 L1 and L3 181 183 L2 and L3 182 183 Record the measurements in Table 4 C Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Parameter Set Up Start Up and Adjustment 4 15 Table 4 C Rated Drive Voltage No Disconnect Option Test Points Expected Value Measured Value L1 to L2 Rated AC Voltage 230 380 415 460V L1 to L3 Rated AC Voltage 230 380 415 460V L2 to L3 Rated AC Voltage 230 380 415 460V Drives with AC Line Disconnect Apply the main power source feeding the Drive and energize the Drive by closing the Drive s AC line disconnect Measure the voltage present between the terminals on the load side of the disconnect 81 and 82 81 and 83 82 and 83 Record the measurements in the following table Table 4 D Rated Drive Voltage With Disconnect Option Test Points Expected Value Measured Value 81 to 82 Rated AC Voltage 230 380 415 460V 81 to 83 Rated AC Voltage 230 380 415 460V 82 to 83 Rated AC Voltage 230 380 415 460V In all cases the three phase input voltage should be equal to the rated Drive AC input voltage 10 If the voltage is not within tolerance verify that the Drive rating is correct or perform the necessary adjustments to the incoming line voltage so that it complies with the Drive rating All Drives ar
159. e shipped with factory default parameter settings Before making any parameter changes review Chapter 5 Programming Parameters Parameter values are changed using the Human Interface Module HIM Before beginning any changes become throughly familiar with the HIM ATTENTION Before starting this procedure make A certain that the Coast to Stop input is locked in the open state The Drive s AC contactor must remain open while the parameter set up is being performed Failure to maintain the input and contactor in the open state could lead to unintended motor or process equipment operation and subsequent damage Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 16 Start Up and Adjustment Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 A ATTENTION Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with the construction and operation of electrical equipment and the hazards involved should install adjust operate and or service this equipment Read and understand this section entirely before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury or loss of life Table 4 E provides a description of the parameters which must be properly configured prior to operating the Drive Unless otherwise noted these parameters are located in the Set Up group Scroll through the Set Up group and set the parameters based on the application For additional information refer to Chapter 5 Programming Parameters For information on operation of the Human
160. e so multiple devices can use different sections of the image To view the values in the I O image table use parameters 226 through 233 for input and 234 through 241 for output 1397 Drive E Logic Command Logic Status 7 Reference Feedback SCANport Device 1 E Data In A1 Par 226 Data Out A1 Par 234 SCANport Device 1 SCANport Device 2 A Data In A2 Par 227 Data Out A2 Par 235 SCANport Device 2 SCANport Device 3 SCANport E Data In B1 Par 228 Data Out B1 Par 236 men SCANport Device 3 SCANport Device 4 Image In Data In B2 Par 229 Data Out B2 Par 237 SCANport Device 4 SCANport Device 5 Data In C1 Par 230 Data Out C1 Par 238 SCANport Device 5 SCANport Device e nets Ut a SUPNBOR Device E Data In D2 Par 233 Data Out D2 Par 241 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 D 6 Using SCANport Capabilities Within the 1397 Drive the I O image table resembles the following Logic Command Logic Status parameter 190 1397 BitO Stop BitO Ready Controller Bit1 Run Bit1 Running Bit2 Jog Bit2 Command Dir A A Bit3 Clear Fault Bit3 Rotating Dir Logic Evaluation Block Logic Status p 190 Bit4 Forward Bit4 Accelerating Reference Bit5 Reverse Bits Decelerating Data In A1 p 226 Bit6 Local Bit6 Warning Data In A2 p 227 Bit7 MOP Increment Bit7 Faulted Data In B1 p 228 Bite NA Bit8 At Set Speed Data In B2 p 229 Bit NA Bit9 Local ID Data In C1 p 230 Bit10 NA Bit10 Local ID Data In C2 p 231 Bit11 NA Bit 1 Loca
161. e to line 2 Select the desired process parameters A zero can be entered to disable line 2 In addition the Process Display can be set to appear when Drive power is applied by simultaneously pressing the Incre ment and Decrement keys while the Process Display active Choose Mode Program Choose Group Process Display Process 1 Par Process 1 Scale 1 00 Process 1 Txt 1 Choose Mode Process Process Var 1 1 Process Var 2 2 Sets Process Display as Power Up Display Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Terminal 3 9 EEProm Mode Reset Defaults The EEProm mode is used to restore all settings to factory default values or upload download parameters between the HIM and Drive 1 To restore factory defaults A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be displayed B Press the Increment or Decrement key until EEProm is displayed If EEProm 1s not in the menu programming is password protected Refer to Password Mode later in this section C Press Enter D Press the Increment or Decrement key until Reset Defaults is displayed E Press Enter to restore all parameters to their original factory settings F Press the Stop key to reset the fault if Choose Mode Display Choose Mode EEProm EEProm Reset Defaults one occurs ESC Drive gt HIM 2 To upload a parameter profile from the Drive to the HIM A From the E
162. ections and replace SCR if necessary 019 SCR 5 Open FIt Indicates SCR number 5 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 020 SCR 6 Open FIt Indicates SCR number 6 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 021 SCR 11 Open Fit Indicates SCR number 11 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 022 SCR 12 Open Fit Indicates SCR number 12 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary NOTE Incorrect setting of CT TURNS RATIO P 036 can also cause faults 015 thru 027 Set the correct value in Parameter 36 and repeat the jumper setting and autotune process Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Troubleshooting 6 5 Fault No Fault Name Description Action 023 SCR 13 Open Fit Indicates SCR number 13 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 024 SCR 14 Open Fit Indicates SCR number 14 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 025 SCR 15 Open Fit Indicates SCR number 15 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 026 SCR 16 Open Fit Indicates SCR number 15 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 027 Multi SCR s Open One or more thyr
163. ed through digital input 4 terminal 63 and decreased through digital input 3 terminal 62 on the I O Expansion board The Mop Output is limited to prevent going over Max Process Spd or under Min Process Spd Mop Accel Time and Mop Decel Time set the time in which the Mop Output can change from zero to Max Motor Speed and vice versa To prevent the S curve block from limiting the rate of change from the Mop Output Mop Accel Time has a low limit equal to Accel Time Mop Decel Time has a low limit equal to Decel Time When Mop Reset Enable is on the MOP output goes to Minimum Speed when the drive stops If it is off the Mop Output remains at its present level when the drive stops MOP Decel Time P 085 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Minimum time in which the Mop Output can change from Max Motor Speed to zero Refer to the Mop Accel Time parameter and block diagram for additional information MOP Reset Enable P 086 Determines if the Mop Output resets or stays at the present level when the drive stops When Mop Reset Enable is on the MOP output goes to Min Process Speed when the drive stops If it is off the Mop Output remains at its present level when the drive stops Refer to the Mop Accel Time parameter and block diagram for additional information Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Mini
164. eedback P 010 Motor Field Amps OCL Reference TP P 020 4095 OCL Ramp Output P 019 OCL Feedback P 017 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 57 OUTPUT CONFIG Anlg Out 3 Type P 152 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Selects the type of signal to be generated by analog output 3 terminals 54 and 55 on the 1 O Expansion board This setting must match the settings of jumpers J14 and J15 on the I O Expansion board Anlg Out 4 Gain P 153 Adjusts analog output 4 Only used if I O Expansion kit is installed Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 0 10V leer OV 2 4 20mA 3 10 50mA 10V Configurable Output Config 1 0 8 VDC Tunable Output Config 1 000 0 500 1 300 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 58 Programming Parameters OUTPUT CONFIG Anlg Out 4 Src P 154 Only available if the I O Expansion kit is Display Drive Units Numeric Text arameter Range 0 Cur Lp 1 Arm Volt installed P R Cur Lp Fdbk 11 Arm Vol Selects the signal used to drive analog output 1 Cur Loop Ref 12 ATach Fdbk 4 terminals 56 and 57 on the I O Expansion 2 Cur Loop Err 13 Encoder Fdbk board When the analog output is at
165. eld weakened speed Top speed is typically more than the base speed when field weakening is applied Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value SECS Setup Tunable 5 0 0 1 300 0 Numeric Setup Configurable 0 Arm Volt 0 Arm Volt 3 AC Tach 96 FLA Setup Configurable 150 25 200 RPM Setup Configurable 500 5 5000 overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause an who understands the significance of setting it Set the value of this parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 24 Programming Parameters SETUP Max Process Spd P 042 The maximum speed of the drive that can be supported by the application or process Max Process Spd can be less than or equal to Max Motor Speed If raising this value causes Min Process Speed to become less than 10 of Max Process Spd an alarm is generated Min Process Spd P 043 Selects the minimum speed of the drive without
166. enclosure Temperatures around the Drive must be kept between 0 and 55 C 32 F and 131 F Humidity must remain between 5 to 95 non condensing The Drive can be applied at elevation of 3300 feet 1 000 meters without derating The Drive current rating must be derated by 346 for each additional 1 000 feet 300 meters Above 10 000 feet 3 000 meters consult the local Allen Bradley Sales Office The 1397 Drive is of the open chassis type construction and is designed to allow you to install it in a suitable enclosure The selection of enclosure type is the responsibility of the user Dimensions and clearances for the 1397 are detailed in the figures on the following pages cutting drilling tapping and welding can be done with the Drive removed from the enclosure The Drive is of the open type construction and any metal debris must be kept from falling into the Drive Metal debris or other foreign matter may become lodged in the circuitry resulting in component damage ATTENTION Plan Drive installation so that all Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 2 Installation Cooling Airflow Line Filters CE Only AC Line Inductors CE Only Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 In order to maintain proper cooling the Drive must be mounted in a vertical position Refer to Figure 2 1 for the recommended minimum clearance of each Drive The Drive design produces up to a 10 C or 18 F air temperature rise when the Drive is operate
167. ent between terminals A1 and 45 gt Set the meter to the 500 VDC range to start and then work down until a measurement can be obtained The voltage at Al should be positive with respect to terminal 45 voltage magnitude is unimportant If the voltage polarity is incorrect remove power from the Drive and refer to the motor connection diagrams in Figures 4 13 amp 4 14 Start Up and Adjustment 4 31 Figure 4 13 DC Motor Connections CCW Rotation F2 Bulletin 1397 Basic Stabilized Shunt Machine CCW Rotation Facing Commutator End Bulletin 1397 Straight Shunt Machine CCW Rotation Facing Commutator End 1 5 to 150 HP 230VAC 3 to 300 HP 460VAC S2 A2 S1 S2 DBR O Link i Removed A2 S1 S2 DBR Link Removed A2 S1 A2 S1 Ki Bulletin 1397 Bulletin 1397 If Used Basic Stabilized Shunt Machine If Used Straight Shunt Machine CCW Rotation Facing Commutator End CCW Rotation Facing Commutator End 2 If this connection of the motor armature leads results in motor rotation opposite of what is required 400 to 600 HP 460VAC reverse the A1 and A2 lead connections at the motor 3 Connect Drive Terminal A2 S1 or S2 to Motor Terminal A2 9 Make certain power is turned off and locked out 10 Switch armature leads connected Al and 45 If itis inconvenient to switch the armature leads the field leads connected at F1 and F2 may be switched instead on a
168. ent in tray CONDUIT SPACING THRU AIR y 115 Volts 1 inch 115 Volts 2 inches 2 Cables of the following classes can be grouped together 230 Volts 1 5 inches 230 Volts 4 inches A Class 1 Equal to or above 601 volts 380 575 Volts 3 inches 380 575 Volts 8 inches B Classes 2 3 and 4 may have their respective circuits pulled in the 575 volts proportional to 6 575 volts proportional to 12 same conduit or layered in the same tray per 1000 volts per 1000 volts C Classes 5 and 6 may have their respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray Note Bundle may not exceed conditions of NEC 310 1 Steel conduit is recommended for all wiring classes Classes 7 11 D Classes7 and 8 may have their respective circuits pulled in the same conduit or layered in the same tray Note Encoder cables run in a bundle may experience some General Notes 2 Spacing shown between classes is the minimum required for parallel runs less than 400 feet Greater spacing should be used where amount of EMI coupling The circuit application may dictate possimus separate spacing 3 Shields for shielded cables must be connected at one end only The E Classes 9 10 and 11 may have their respective circuits pulled in other end should be cut back and insulated Shields for cables from a the same conduit or layered in the same tray cabinet to an external device must be connected at cabinet end Communication cables run i
169. er PPR parameter can cause an overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person who understands the significance of setting it Set the value of this parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury A Encoder Quad Setup Group P 049 On This parameter only needs to be set if Feedback Type was set to Pulse Tach Encoder Quad enables or disables pulse tachometer quadrature Set On for a bidirectional pulse tachometer Set Off for a unidirectional pulse tachometer If Encoder Quad is set to Off while Pulse Tach is the selected Feedback Type Neg Current Lim will be set to O and Reverse Disable set to On preventing reverse direction Accel Time Setup Group P 037 5 0 Seconds The time it takes to accelerate from 0 to Max Motor Speed P 041 Smaller changes in speed take proportionately less time If Trim Mode Type P 117 is set to Proportional this time value is modified by Draw Percent Out P 009 Decel Time Setup Group P 038 5 0 Seconds Decel Time selects the time it takes to decelerate from Top Speed to 0 Smaller changes in speed take proportionately less time If Trim Mode Select is set to Proportional this time value is modified by Draw Percent Out Selects the minimum speed of the Drive without being stopped It is typically greater than zero If it is less than
170. er Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Read Only Diagnostics 0 0 100 Numeric Text Read Only Diagnostics 0 5 Read Only Diagnostics 0 0 6500 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 72 Programming Parameters Start Mask P 201 This parameter controls which adapters can issue Run commands 0000000001111111 Direction Mask P 202 This parameter controls which adapters can issue forward reverse commands This mask contains a bit for each adapter If a bit is set to 0 control is locked out if it is set to 1 the adapter is permitted to have control Jog Mask P 203 This parameter controls which adapters can issue jog commands i 0000000001111111 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read amp Write Masks 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Ad
171. er control loop in speed units This is the OCL trim that is applied to the speed voltage control loop Refer to the Outer Control Loop block diagram Fig A 5 for additional information OCL Ramp Output P 019 The outer control loop reference ramp output in OCL user units This is the OCL reference output after OCL reference rounding and S curve have been applied Refer to the OCL Ramp Time block diagram for additional information OCL Reference TP P 020 The value of the currently selected OCL Reference Source Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Enum Text Metering Read Only 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled CNTS Metering 0 5120 5120 RPM Metering 0 5000 5000 CNTS Metering 0 4095 4095 CNTS Read Only Metering 0 4095 4095 Programming Parameters 5 19 METERING Spd Loop Error P 021 The speed loop error signal which represents the difference between the Spd Loop Ref and the Spd Loop Fdbk signals Spd Loop Fdbk P 022 An
172. er on pins 2 and 3 Disable Any loss of field current is ignored Use the Disable option only when no field exists such as with a permanent magnet motor or when a separate field supply is used IMPORTANT Jumper J20 has no effect if a Regulated Field Supply is installed No fault is generated with a Regulated Field Supply Setting the Drive for the Enhanced Field Supply Jumper J21 IMPORTANT This jumper has no effect on the standard field supply or the optional Field Current Regulator Kit The Field Supply Jumper J21 determines the voltage range that the Drive expects to see from the optional Enhanced Field Supply kit Refer to the instructions supplied with the kit for more information on the Enhanced Field Supply The DC voltage range can be either from 45 to 9096 or from 90 to 112 596 To set the Drive for a voltage range of 45 to 90 place the jumper on pins 1 and 2 To set the Drive for a voltage range of 90 to 112 5 place the jumper on pins 2 and 3 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 24 Start Up and Adjustment Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Setting the Source for the Anlg Reference 2 Jumper J19 Manual Ref on board correct speed if Jumper J19 is not set to the correct position Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION The Drive will not operate at the The Manual Ref jumper J19 determines whether the internal 10 V isolated p
173. er speed loop tuning e Pulse Tach Quadrature set to ON for a non regenerative Check pulse tach wiring tach scaling drive fuses and speed loop tuning Replace e Incorrect pulse tach wiring tach if necessary 004 Fld Current Loss The field loss detection circuit has not sensed any field current flowing in the motor shunt field possibly due to e Motor field winding not connected or an open circuit e Blown field supply fuse s e Blown AC line fuse s Check fuses field supply wiring and e Field supply failure motor windings Replace motor if e Wiring harness damaged loose or disconnected necessary 005 Sustained Overld Inverse time overload circuit trip possibly caused by e Incorrect armature current feedback scaling Check process equipment and motor e Blown A C line fuses for binding Check for blown fuses e Mechanical binding preventing the motor shaft from Check armature current feedback rotating freely scaling Replace motor if necessary 006 Blower Starter Blower motor starter is open If a blower motor starter kit is not installed connector P8 must be fitted with the proper substitute connector to inhibit this fault Other possible causes e Blown motor starter fuse s e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged blower Check motor starter fuses and wiring motor starter wiring Replace blower motor starter and or e Blower motor overload blower motor if necessary 007 Open Armature The motor armature circuit is ope
174. erence selected when REF SELECT OPEN Analog Tachometer Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Input for DC analog tachometer Start Up and Adjustment 4 27 Verify that the standard inputs connected to the Drive are properly terminated and produce the desired operation If an input does not produce the desired result remove power from the Drive and verify the installation 1 2 Apply power to the Drive Coast to Stop Input With the Coast Stop input in its CLOSED position i e not in a coast stop condition measure the voltage present between terminals 7 and 8 of the regulator board terminal strip The measured voltage should be approximately OV DC Repeat this procedure with the Coast to Stop input OPEN 1 e Drive in a Coast Stop condition The measured voltage should be 24V After proper operation is verified leave the Coast to Stop input in its OPEN position 1 e Coast to Stop the Drive Coast to Stop condition could allow the Drive to ATTENTION Failure to put the Drive in the restart when performing the following checks Failure to observe this precaution could lead to personal injury and or equipment damage Stop Input Repeat step 2 measuring the voltage present between terminals 1 and 3 of the regulator terminal board The voltage across the stop input should be OVDC with the Stop input CLOSED Stop Not initiated and 24VDC with the stop input OPEN stop initiated Customer Interlock Input
175. ermostat wiring or cooling as required 010 AC Line Sync Fit Three phase AC line synchronization circuit malfunction possibly due to e Blown AC line fuses s e AC line frequency outside the required range of 48 62Hz Check all cables and connections e Excessive AC line noise or distortion Replace blown line fuses if necessary e Unstable AC line frequency Line filters or a transformer may be e Disconnected improperly connected or damaged J6 necessary to cure line frequency or ribbon cable noise problems 011 Arm Over Voltage Armature voltage exceeded 130 of Motor Arm Volts Par 046 due to e Motor Arm Volts not set properly e Improper voltage loop tuning Reset Parameters 44 and 272 if e E Fld Volts Adj Par 272 set too high necessary Rerun Voltage Loop Enhanced Field Supply only Tuning if required 012 CAN Comm Lost Drive to Drive or Drive to Control communication lost Check attached communication peripherals for proper operation Replace if necessary 015 SCR 1 Open Fit Indicates SCR number 1 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 016 SCR 2 Open FIt Indicates SCR number 2 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 017 SCR 3 Open Fit Indicates SCR number 3 is non operational Check SCR wiring and connections and replace SCR if necessary 018 SCR 4 Open Fit Indicates SCR number 4 is non operational Check SCR wiring and conn
176. erting a 300 HP 1397 Drive from 460 to 230 VAC Line Input Unlike lower horsepower units 200 300 HP 1397 Drives can be converted from 460VAC input to 230 VAC input without the use of a conversion kit To convert a 300 HP Drive perform the following steps e Disconnect and lock out all incoming power to the Drive e Disconnect the jumpers between H2 and H3 on the control transformer as shown in Figure 4 3 e Use the jumpers that were removed to connect H1 to H3 and H4 to H2 as shown in Figure 4 3 e Reconnect power to the Drive e Access parameter 51 Nominal AC Volt Set the value to 230 Converting a 600 HP 1397 Drive from 460 to 230 VAC Line Input Converting a 600 HP Drive from 460 to 230VAC input is NOT recommended A 600 HP 1397 Drive operating off a 230VAC line input may not have sufficient voltage for the field supply Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Start Up and Adjustment 4 5 Figure 4 3 Control Transformer Settings 230 380 415 460 VAC Drives for HP Rated Drives Control Transformer Set for 460V AC Input Line Control Transformer Set for 230V AC Input Line Control Transformer Set for 415V AC Input Line Control Transformer Set for 380V AC Input Line Publication 13
177. ese precautions could result in bodily injury or damage to equipment ATTENTION If the AC input power system does not Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 20 Installation Figure 2 13 AC Line Connection Location 1 5 30 HP at 230 VAC 3 60 HP at 460 VAC 7 110A 380 415 VAC n AC Line Connection USE s F up 182 L1 L2 183 3 Coo O O D Cy A Go E 3 O ES FRONT NM kt E lala ONO IB Le a eaa ja BE anong og 580 6 M Without AC Line Disconnect Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 pe AC Line io a Connection 8 8 8 b Lt 2 13 E ru aa Ur BE LY QVOWDVO DE Dc HN FRONT e alla ES a ky e las KK el i GIGle E e je e e r e Allen Bradley SHE S S UU 5 0L With AC Line Disconnect Installation 2 21 Figure 2 14 AC Line Connection Location 40 75 HP at 230 VAC 75 150 HP at 460 VAC 265A O 380 415 VAC
178. eset Programming Parameters 5 71 DIAGNOSTICS Alarm Reset P 197 Allows resetting of the fault or alarm through the HIM Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Ready 1 Reset Read Only Diagnostics 0 0 1 Note Analog input 2 terminals 52 and 53 on the I O Expansion board only accepts a 10 VDC input signal and cannot be changed CPU Loading P 198 Shows the amount in that the CPU is busy Should always display 100 Not Ready Cause P 199 Shows those inputs or conditions that cause the Drive to remain Not Ready Bit Enum 0 Stop Asserted TB Coast DB TB Interlock Fault Active Config Active Field Perm oarwoh A ScanPort Errors P 200 The value of this parameter is incremented everytime a SCANport message is not received when expected from a peripheral device This value incrementing occasionaly does not indicate a problem The value will change if SCANport devices are removed or reconnected to the drive A value that is consistently incrementing over a period of time indicates a possible electrical noise problem or malfunctioning peripheral SCANport device Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Paramet
179. f 2 Source pg 5 36 92 Jog Acc Dec Time pg 5 36 93 Jog Reference pg 5 36 94 Jog Off Dly Time pg 5 37 FEATURE SELECT 99 Min Speed Bypass pg 5 38 100 Ref Ramp Bypass pg 5 38 101 Current Compound pg 5 38 102 Inertia Comp Src pg 5 39 103 Monitor 1 Delay pg 5 39 104 Monitor 1 Source pg 5 40 105 Monitor 1 Level pg 5 40 106 Monitor 2 Delay pg 5 41 107 Monitor 2 Source pg 5 41 108 Monitor 2 Level pg 5 42 109 Normal Inertia pg 5 42 110 Reverse Disable pg 5 42 111 S Curve Rounding pg 5 43 112 AutoTune Bridge pg 5 43 113 AutoTune Fld Rng pg 5 44 114 AutoTune Stablty pg 5 44 115 Stop Mode Type pg 5 44 116 Stop Speed Level pg 5 44 117 Trim Mode Type pg 5 45 118 Trim Range pg 5 45 119 Trim Ref Source pg 5 45 120 Trim Reference pg 5 46 121 OCL Enable Src pg 5 46 122 Inertia Comp Reg pg 5 46 Programming Parameters INPUT CONFIG 127 Anlg In 1 Gain pg 5 47 128 Anlg In 1 Type pg 5 47 129 Anlg In 1 Zero pg 5 47 130 Anlg In 2 Gain pg 5 47 131 Anlg In 2 Zero pg 5 48 132 Anlg In 3 Gain pg 5 48 134 Anlg In 3 Zero pg 5 49 135 Anlg In 4 Gain pg 5 49 136 Anlg In 4 Zero pg 5 49 137 Freq In Scale pg 5 49 138 Freq In Zero pg 5 50 p 133 Anlg In 3 Type pg 5 48 p Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 3 5 4 Programming Parameters OUTPUT CONFIG 144 Anlg Out 1 Gain pg 5 51 145 Anlg Out 1 Src pg 5 52
180. f space heaters are required in cold or damp environments when the Drive is not being operated select space heaters to produce approximately one half of the heat dissipation capacity of the enclosure Appendix D Using SCANport Capabilities Chapter Objectives This appendix provides information for changing the default configuration to customize the way SCANport works for you This Topic Starts on page Understanding the Logic Status parameter D1 Configuring the SCANport controls D3 Setting the loss of communications fault D 5 Using the SCANport I O image D 5 Logic Status Parameter Logic Status P 190 on the 1397 Drive provides a record of which functions are currently executing To use SCANport capabilities effectively you must understand how Logic Status works Logic Status bits include BIT FUNCTION BIT FUNCTION 0 Ready 8 At Speed 1 Running 9 Local I D 2 Command Dir 10 Local l D 3 Actual Dir 11 Local I D 4 Accelerating 12 Reference I D 5 Decelerating 13 Reference I D 6 Alarm 14 Reference D 7 Fault 15 Reference I D You cannot change the values shown in the Logic Status parameter by directly acccessing the parameter Instead the Logic Status parameter receives information from the logic evaluation block Fig D 1 Figure D 1 SCANport Interaction with Logic Status Logic Status Parameter 190 Bit 0 Enabled SCANport 2 Bit1
181. f the display Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 65 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 109 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 112 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 115 127 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 86 Programming Parameters Process Display Process 2 Text 5 P 263 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 2 Par and Process 2 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 2 of the display Process 2 Text 6 P 264 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 2 Par and Process 2 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 2 of the display Process 2 Text 7 P 265 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 2 Par and Process 2 Scale The 8 character description will
182. f the line impedance is too low transient voltage spikes or interruptions can create excessive current spikes that will cause nuisance input fuse blowing and may cause damage to the Drive power structure Refer to Figures 2 13 through 2 16 for AC input wiring at the main fuses and the following ATTENTION note when determining if a line reactor or isolation transformer is required for your installation AC Line Connection Connect incoming three phase AC line power to the AC Line Terminals as shown in Figures 2 13 through 2 16 Note that the incoming AC power is wired to separate terminals on the 1 5 30HP 3 60HP 7 110A Drives but is wired directly to AC line fuses on 40 75HP 75 150HP 100 150 200 300HP 265A and higher and 400 to 600 HP Drives The fuses supplied are designed to provide protection against short circuits for the Drive semiconductors and associated output wiring They are not to be considered a substitute for the user supplied motor branch circuit protective devices that are required by the National Electrical Code Refer to Table 2 E for proper sizing of the AC power and branch fuses have a neutral or one phase referenced to ground an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is highly recommended If the line to line voltages on any phase can exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is always required Failure to observe th
183. ference 2 Terminals 16 17 18 see page 4 24 for J19 jumper settings Potentiometer 5kQ minimum External Voltage Source 10 VDC 0 to 10 Volts DC Analog Tachometer Feedback see page 4 20 for J11 and J14 jumper settings Tach Voltage at Top speed 10 to 250 VDC The two metering analog outputs are available at regulator board terminals 24 25 and 26 Terminal 25 is the common connection for both output signals The selected signals for both meter outputs are averaged filtered over 100 ms to reduce meter fluctuations NOTE Refer to the Start Up chapter for information on programming Analog Outputs Electrical Specifications Output Voltage 10 VDC 4 mA Introduction 1 9 Drive Description The Drive is a 3 phase full wave power converter without flyback rectifier complete with a digital current regulator and a digital speed regulator for armature voltage or speed regulation by tachometer feedback Shown in Figure 1 2 is a block diagram of the 1397 Drive The Drive employs wireless regulator construction and uses a keypad for Drive setup including parameter adjustments and unit selection monitoring and diagnostics Reference feedback and metering signals can be interfaced to the Drive The Drive can be controlled locally by the control device HIM GPT DriveTools etc keypad or remotely by using the terminals at the regulator board terminal strip Figure 1 2 1397 Block Diagram SCANPORT I O Expansion Regulator B
184. fixed 10 VDC reference which is connected at terminals 16 17 and 18 ANALOG REFERENCE 1 which is connected at Terminals TB19 and TB20 is a selectable signal type reference determined by Anlg In 1 Type P 128 and regulator board jumpers J10 and J12 ANALOG REFERENCE 1 can be set for 0 10 VDC 10 VDC 4 20mA or 10 50 mA Figure 2 29 Regulator Board Terminal Strip Analog Input Connections PLC END lt 10V ISOL Analog Ref 2 SOU Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 40 Installation Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 7 Wiring the Output Circuits The 1397 Drive contains 2 Analog Outputs and 3 Digital Outputs as illustrated in Figure 2 30 The Analog Outputs are fixed 10 VDC outputs that are updated every 20 ms by the Drive and are sent thru a 100 ms running averaging filter within the drive ANALOG OUTPUT 1 is connected at terminals 24 and 25 and Anlg Out 1 Src P 145 determines which Drive testpoint is the source selected ANALOG OUTPUT 2 is connected at terminals 25 and 26 and Analog Out 2 Src P 148 determines which Drive testpoint is the source selected The Digital Outputs indicate the present operating state of the Drive and are connected as follows Terminals 27 28 1 Running 0 Not Running Terminals 29 30 1 Alarm active 0 No alarms active Terminals 31 32 0 Fault active 1 No faults active Figure 2 30 Regulator Board Terminal Strip Output Connections e ANALOG
185. for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Hazard of electric shock or equipment You must provide a main disconnect and lockout device with cabinet interlocks This device must be wired in the isolation transformer or reactor primary circuit The device must be sized to handle 115 of the full load primary current plus any additional loads that are connected to the control system Proper branch circuit protection for the Drive and additional devices must be provided according to NEC and local codes NOTE Refer to Table on Page 1 6 for Drive current ratings to aid in properly sizing wire The 1397 is equipped with a 250mA 24V power supply to power additional peripheral devices For example up to two of the following 24V DC Scanport modules can be used 1203 GK1 Single Point Remote I O 1203 GK2 DFI RS 232 422 485 or DH 485 Installation 2 15 Wire Size Type amp Class Terminal O Symbol If more than two SCANport modules are used with the 1397 Drive an additional 24V DC power supply must be installed or 115V SCANport modules must be used Refer to the SCANport user manual for information on installing additional SCANport modules The 24V DC power supply can be accessed at terminals 14 24V DC and 15
186. g 0 50 0 Tunable Feature Select 112 AutoTune Bridge Selection 0 1 0 Forward Tunable Feature Select 113 AutoTune Fld Rng 0 90 5 00 1 00 Tunable Feature Select 114 AutoTune Stabilty 10 100 25 Tunable Feature Select 115 Stop Mode Type Selectable O0 Ramp 2 Coast DB 2 Tunable Feature Select 116 Stop Speed Level RPM 0 MaxSpd X 50 Tunable Feature Select 117 Trim Mode Type Selectable 0 No Trim 2 Proportion o No Trim Tunable Feature Select Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 9 PARM NAME UNITS MIN MAX DEFAULT TYPE FUNCTION 118 Trim Range 0 0 1000 0 Feature Select 119 Trim Ref Source Enum 0 11 0 Feature Select 120 Trim Reference 100 0 100 0 Feature Select 121 OCL ENABLE SRC Enum 0 1 0 Feature Select 122 FEATR SEL 1 Hidden FUTURE USE Feature Select 123 FEATR SEL 2 Hidden FUTURE USE Feature Select 124 FEATR SEL 3 Hidden FUTURE USE Feature Select 125 FEATR SEL 4 Hidden FUTURE USE Feature Select 126 FEATR SEL 5 Hidden FUTURE USE Feature Select 127 Anlg In 1 Gain 0 750 1 250 1 000 Tunable Input Config 128 Anlg In 1 Type Volts Amps 0 3 0 0 10V Configurable Input Config 129 Anlg In 1 Zero 200 200 1 000 Tunable Input Config 130 Anlg In 2 Gain 0 750 1 250 AL 10V Tunable Input Config 131 Anlg In 2 Zero 200 200 0 Tunable Input Config 132 Anlg In 3 Gain 0 750 2 250 3 10 50mA Tunable Input Config 133 Anlg In 3 Type Volts Amps 0 10V 10 50mA 0 Configurable Input Config 134 Anlg In 3 Zero 200 200 1 0
187. g 50 OCL Ref Source P 301 Selects the reference for the outer control loop If Register is selected the reference is obtained from the OCL Reference The I O Expansion Kit must be installed to use Analog In 3 terminals 50 and 51 on the I O expansion board Analog In 4 terminals 52 and 53 or Frequency In terminal 39 40 and 41 Ramp Time Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Ramp Time Numeric Text 0 Register 1 Anlg In 3 2 Anlg In 4 3 Frequency In 4 Adapter 1 5 Adapter 2 6 Adapter 3 7 Adapter 4 8 Adapter 5 9 Adapter 6 Configurable Process PI 0 0 9 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 96 Programming Parameters Process Pl OCL Trim Range P 302 The trim range for the outer control loop This specifies the amount of control the outer control loop output signal has on the speed voltage loop reference It is set as a percentage of Max Process Speed Refer to the OCL Lead Freq block diagram for additional information OCL Enable P 303 Parameter that controls enabling or disabling the OCL when OCL Enable Src is set to Register OCL Fdbk Reg P 304 Allows Outer Control Loop Feedback value to be entered via Datalink also when OCL Fdbk Source P 290 is set to Register This parameter s value is not saved through a power cycle it is reset to ze
188. g and description of the various Drive faults and alarms with possible solutions when applicable the 1397 Drive and associated machinery should perform troubleshooting or maintenance functions on the Drive Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with During Startup you should have recorded board jumper settings for each board software version numbers and the Drive and motor nameplate data in Tables 4 A 4 E and 4 G If they were not record them at this time before beginning any troubleshooting procedures For initial troubleshooting a HIM programming device is required to read fault codes In addition to a programming device the following equipment is recommended before initiating any troubleshooting procedures LJ Digital Multimeter DMM capable of 1000V DC 750VAC with one megohm minimum input impedance L1 Clamp on Ammeter AC DC with current ratings to 2X rated current output of 1397 DC Drive LI Dual trace oscilliscope with differential capability digital storage two X10 and one X100 calibrated probes optional but recommended ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result A from improper useage of an oscilliscope and other test equipment The oscilliscope chassis may be at potentially fatal voltage 1f not properly grounded Allen Bradley does not recommend use of an oscilliscope to directly measure high voltages Use an isolated
189. g quick start the Drive calculates the value of the tachometer voltage range based on the values of Max Process Speed P 042 and Anlg Tach v 1000 P 047 and the setting of Feedback Select The correct values are displayed under the Diagnostics menu on the HIM Verify these jumper settings before performing the auto tuning procedure Start Up and Adjustment 4 25 correct speed if jumpers J11 and J14 are not set to the correct positions Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION The Drive will not operate at the The expected analog tachometer voltage range can be set to a maximum of 250 or 62V DC Jumper J11 selects the hardware circuitry to maximize the resolution over the entire speed range Table 4 1 Regulator Board Jumpers Jumper J14 Jumper J11 Top Speed Tach Volts lt 16 Volts Low 16 Top Speed Tach Volts lt 31 Volts Low 31 125 Top Speed Tach Volts lt 62 Volts Low 62 250 Top Speed Tach Volts lt 125 Volts High 31 125 Top Speed Tach Volts lt 250 Volts High 62 250 Note The output voltage of the tachometer must not exceed 250 V for DC tachometers or 275 RMS for AC tachometers when the motor is rotating at Max Motor Speed To calculate the output voltage at top speed multiply the two parameter values Tach Voltage at Max Motor Speed Max Motor Speed x Analog Tach v per thousand 1000 Analog Reference 1 Set up Jumpers J
190. hat are not at their default values Control Status Available on Series B HIM only Permits the drive logic mask to be disabled enabled allowing HIM removal while Drive power is applied This menu also provides access to a fault queue and a warning queue which will list the last ten faults or alarms respectively that have occurred Trip displayed with a fault indicates the actual fault that tripped the Drive A clear function clears the queue it will also clear an active fault alarm condition Password The Password mode protects the Drive parameters against programming changes by unauthorized personnel When a password has been assigned access to the Program EEProm modes and the Control Logic Clear Fault Queue menus can only be gained when the correct password has been entered The password can be any five digit number between 00000 and 65535 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 3 6 Programming Terminal FIGURE 3 4 1397 HIM Programming Steps Power Up Mode amp OPERATOR LEVEL Status Display Choose Mode MODE LEVEL DISPLAY gt PROCESS lt PROGRAM lt SEARCH CONTROL PASSWORD STATUS Process Display Reset Defaults Control Logic Login Logout Upload Parameters Fault Queue Modify Download Parameters Warning Queue Recall Values Save Values GROUP LEVEL LINEAR LIST METERING ADVANCED FEATURE OUTPUT SETUP SELECT CONFIG DIAGNOSTICS
191. in severe bodily injury or loss of life Programming Parameters 5 25 SETUP Motor Field Amps P 044 Motor nameplate value of the rated field Display Drive Units Amps amps This parameter scales the field current parameter Type Configurable feedback Minimum and maximum values are dependent on the installed supply rating GTOuP Setup Factory Defaut 0 01 amp Minimum Value Maximum Value 0 11 4 amp 0 28 10 amp 0 55 20 amp 4 00 4 amp 10 00 10 amp or 20 00 20 amp A ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause a motor overvoltage condition Set motor Motor Field Amps to the motor s nameplate value Make sure Field Econ Ref and or Field Reference P 280 is set greater than Fld Loss Level P 277 to guard against field loss faults Failure to observe this precaution can result in bodily injury and damage to the equipment Motor Field Amps Field Reference Motor Field Amps Field Econ Ref Field Current Feedback Motor Arm Amps P 045 Motor Field Amps Field Reference TP To Field Current Regulator Control Block Field Feedback Fld Loop K Fdbk The rated armature current from the motor Display Drive Units Amps nameplate Parameter Type Configurable Group Setup Factory Default 8 0 Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 3000 0 A ATTENTION The drive will not operate properly if this parameter value is entered incorrectly
192. ing Configurable Parameter can only be changed when the drive is not running To help differentiate parameter names and display text from other text in this manual the following conventions will be used e Parameter names will appear in Brackets e Display text will appear in quotes METERING Anlg In 1 P 001 Analog reference 1 value measured by the drive after all hardware and software scaling Anlg In 2 P 002 Analog reference value measured by the drive after all hardware and software scaling Anlg In 3 P 003 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed The value representing analog input 3 terminals 50 and 51 on the I O Expansion board after gain and zero have been applied Refer to the I O Expansion Inputs Fig A 2 block diagram for additional information Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units RPM Group Metering Parameter Type Output Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 5369 Maximum Value 5369 Display Drive Units RPM Group Metering Parameter Type Output Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 5369 Maximum Value 5369 Display Drive Units CNTS Group Metering Parameter Type Output Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 5369 Maximum Value 5369 Programming Parameters 5 15 METERING Anlg In 4 P 004 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed The value representing analog input 4 terminals 50 and 51 on the I O Expansion board after gain a
193. ing PLC operation Data In B2 P 229 This parameter displays the parameter number to which PLC output data table information will be directly written during PLC operation Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Programming Parameters 5 79 Adapter 1 0 Data In C1 P 230 This parameter displays the parameter number to which PLC output data table information will be directly written during PLC operation Data In C2 P 231 This parameter displays the parameter number to which PLC output data table information will be directly written during PLC operation Data In D1 P 232 This parameter displays the parameter number to which PLC output data table information will be directly written during PLC operation Data In D2 P 233 This parameter displays the parameter number to which PLC output data table information will be di
194. ing connected to this board must be run in shielded cable or continuous conductive conduit CE Conformity B 13 Dynamic Braking Kit The Standard dynamic braking resistor kits can be installed on the top of the electrical cabinet either in an expanded sheet metal enclosure or solid plate enclosure without impact on compliance The kit enclosure can be used for the resistors and dynamic braking circuit The DC motor armature leads to the resistor enclosure are to be dressed close to the mounting panel as shown in Figure B 8 Encoder Pulse and AC Tachometer Kits The tachometer cables for these kits must be run as shielded cable or in a continuous conductive conduit A ground wire must be run with the tachometer wires and terminated to ground at both ends The shield or conduit must be terminated to ground as discussed above and shown in Figures 2 4 and B 7 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 B 14 CE Conformity Figure B 10 Typical 1397 Wiring for EMC Compliance With I O Expansion Board Installed AC POWER ENTRY ELECTRICAL CABINET ENCLOSURE DISCONNECT TTT B Fi F2 Al A2 1397 Drive GROUNDING BUS BAR AC MAINS FILTER REGULATOR BOARD TERMINALS TO 1 0 EXPANSION BOARD TERMINALS REGULATOR BOARD CONVENIENCE TERMINALS AC MAINS INDUCTOR lO EXPANSION BOARD CONVENIENCE TERMINALS BRAIDED STRAP BRAIDED STRAP d ENCLOSURE SKIN CONTROL AND DOOR DC MOTOR CONDUIT TO GROUND BAR ARMATURE AND TACHOME
195. ion ground lead is not provided you must provide a fine braided copper strap conductor of sufficient current capacity to handle system ground fault currents This strap must be connected from the system ground terminal to the building s steel works Figure B 4 Typical European Power Distribution Center of Star Distribution Transformer Control Equipment Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Control System Ground A star ground system must be provided For convenience the star ground can be extended by using copper bus bar that is at least 10 times wider than it is thick All electronic and electromagnetic equipment on the panel must be connected to the star system Equipment that must be connected includes the 1397 Drive the AC line filter the AC line inductor the cabinet door and all non welded side and back panels To connect the equipment use fine wire braided copper strap The strap should be at least 3 2 mm x 12 7 mm 0 125 x 0 5 with 150 strands Provide a convenience termination ground for the connection of the shield of shielded signal and power cables Refer to Figures B 5 and B 6 for proper termination of shielded cables CE Conformity B 9 Figure B 5 Termination of Shielded Cables using a Termination Fitting Braided Strap to Star Ground Connecting K Ground Grounded Copper Bar Mounting Panel Electrical Es 3 Ta Shielded Cable NY Suz Cabinet ee NN Termination Fitting
196. ircuit conductors for the specific Drive rating and according to applicable codes 6 Locate and connect the DC motor armature leads and the shunt field supply leads on the Drive Figures 2 13 through 2 16 ATTENTION 400 to 600 HP 460VAC Regenerative Drives require an externally mounted Inverting Fault Protection device connected in the armature circuit Refer to the instruction manual provided with the Inverting Fault Protection device you have selected for your drive for connection information Failure to provide Inverting Fault Protection could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life The following procedure provides the steps needed to properly perform the power wiring connections to the 1397 Drive Using Table 2 C verify that the motor field is compatible with the DC field voltage output of the Drive Table 2 C Standard Field Voltage Output AC Incoming Voltage to Drive 230V AC 380V AC 415V AC 460V AC DC Supply Output Voltage to Field 150V DC 250V DC 270V DC 300V DC Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 18 Installation 1 Connect the motor armature and field leads to produce proper direction of motor rotation Figure 2 12 shows the connections required to produce counterclockwise rotation of the motor when viewed from the commutator end with a positive speed reference input to the Drive Figure 2 12 Typical DC Motor Connections CCW Rotation 1 5 to 150HP 230VAC 3 to 300HP O 460VAC
197. is immediately reset and Minimum Value 0 1 the level detector output is set to off Maximum Value 100 0 The parameter range for the level detector is automatically rescaled for speed or current based on the input selected by Monitor 1 Source If Cur Loop Fdbk is selected for Monitor 1 Source the parameter range is 0 1 to Maximum Current For any other Monitor 1 Source settings the parameter range is 0 1 to 100 0 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 41 FEATURE SELECT Monitor 2 Delay P 106 The delay time in seconds for the monitor 2 circuit Refer to the Level Detectors block diagram A 12 for additional Information Monitor 2 Source P 107 Selects the signal that drives monitor 2 Current Loop Feedback Average ut Lp Fdbk Spd Lp Fdbk Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value From Speed Loop Block Diagram AS From Speed Reference Ramp Block Diagram Spd Ramp In From Speed Reference _Spd Src In Source Block Diagram Spd Ramp Out P105 Monitor 1 Level Monitor 1 Delay SECS Tunable Feature Select 1 0 seconds 0 seconds 30 0 seconds Numeric Text 0 Cur Lp Fdbk 1 Spd Lp Fdbk 2 Spd Ramp Out 3 Spd Ramp In 4 Spd Src Out Configurable Feature Select 3 Spd Ramp In
198. istor SCR is not carrying an equal load possibly due to e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged thyristor gating circuit Check SCRs SCR wiring and AC Line e Blown AC line fuse s fuses Repair or replace as e Improper Speed Voltage Loop tuning necessary Run Speed Voltage Loop e Malfunctioning thyristor SCR tuning if necessary 030 044 SCR Shorted Fit One or more SCRs have shorted out possibly due to Replace shorted SCRs using the e Improper Heat Sink preparation correct heat sink compound and e Improper Torqueing of SCR torqueing techniques 045 SelfTune Abort Auto Tune aborted by external input Possible causes include Check for drive faults open interlocks e Operator stop initiated or programmed stop routines Cycle e Drive interlock s open power to reset drive and attempt to e Drive fault became active run Auto Tune again 046 ST Spd Fdbk FIt A non zero speed feedback value exists at self tune start possibly due to Check process equipment to e Incorrect speed feedback scaling or offset determine if overhauling load exists If e Overhauling load causing motor shaft rotation not reset feedback scaling and offset 047 ST Inductance Calculated armature inductance is out of range possibly due to e Motor armature winding not connected or an open circuit exists Check for blown fuses and open e Blown inverting fault DC fuse circuit breakers replace reset and e Inverting fault breaker tripped tune as necessary
199. ite Process Display 261 PROCESS 2 TEXT3 ASCII 32 127 112 Read amp Write Process Display 262 PROCESS 2TEXT4 ASCII 32 127 115 Read amp Write Process Display 263 PROCESS 2TEXT5 ASCII 32 127 32 Read amp Write Process Display 264 PROCESS 2TEXT6 ASCII 32 127 32 Read amp Write Process Display 265 PROCESS 2TEXT7 ASCII 32 127 32 Read amp Write Process Display 266 PROCESS 2 TEXT8 ASCII 32 127 32 Read amp Write Process Display 267 PROC DISP 1 FUTURE USE Process Display 268 PROC DISP 2 FUTURE USE Process Display 269 PROC DISP 3 FUTURE USE Process Display 270 PROC DISP 4 FUTURE USE Process Display 271 PROC DISP 5 FUTURE USE Process Display 272 E Fld Volts Adj Degrees 0 180 84 Tunable Field 273 Fld Econ Delay Min 0 27 5 Tunable Field Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 PARM NAME 274 Fld Econ Ref 275 Fld Auto Weak 276 Field Delta Hi Lim 277 Fld Loss Level 278 Fld Lp lead Freq 279 Fld Loop Kp 280 Fld Reference 281 Fld Loop K Fdbk 282 Fld Weak Freq 283 Fld Weaken KP 284 Fld Weaken Level 285 FIELD 1 286 FIELD 2 287 FIELD 3 288 FIELD 4 289 FIELD 5 290 OCL Fdbk Source 291 OCL LeadLag Freq 292 OCL LeadLag Ratio 293 OCL LeadLag Type 294 OCL KP 295 OCL Lead Freq 296 OCL Pos Limit 297 OCL Neg Limit 298 OCL Ramp Time 299 OCL Reference 300 OCL Ref Rounding 301 OCL Ref Source 302 OCL Trim Range 303 OCL Enable 304 PROC PI 1 305 PROC PI 2 306 PROC PI 3 307 PROC PI 4 308 PROC PI 5 UNITS MIN 0 Numweic 0
200. k the microbus ribbon cable and unsuppressed brake coils relays or contactors replace if necessary Check the e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged Microbus regulator board and replace if ribbon cable necessary Check for noise sources e Malfunctioning regulator board and correct if possible Make certain e Malfunctioning microbus peripheral all leads and wiring are separated e Microbus peripheral found that is not supported by the correctly and run in proper conduit regulator firmware with correct shield terminations 600 699 Memory Fault e Regulator board memory malfunction Check regulator board and replace if necessary 700 749 uP Hardware Fit e Regulator board hardware malfunction Check regulator board and replace if necessary 750 799 uP Exception FIt e Unexpected regulator board interrupt e Possibly due to electrical noise from improper wiring practices or unsuppressed brake coils relays or Check regulator board and replace if contactors necessary Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Troubleshooting 6 7 Alarms Table 6 B presents a listing and description of the Drive alarms CTB Control Terminal Block in the following table Table 6 B Alarm Conditions Alarm No Alarm Name Description 001 Brush Wear Low The Motor brush wear detector indicates the brushes are worn or that the customer terminal block pins CTB 12 4 CTB 14 have not been jumpered in cases where a
201. l ID Data In D1 p 232 Bit 13 Ref Select Bit 12 Ref ID Data In D2 p 233 Bit 13 Ref Select Bit13 Ref ID Bit 14 Ref Select Bit14 Ref ID Bit 15 MOP Decrement Bit15 Ref ID Logic Status p 190 Feedback Qu Spd Loop Fdbk p 22 Data Out A1 p 234 000 No Command Data Out A2 p 235 001 Ref 1 Selectable Data Out B1 p 236 010 Ref 2 Selectable Data Out B2 p 237 011 Ref 3 Preset 1 Data Out C1 p 238 100 Ref 4 Preset 2 Data Out C2 p 239 101 Ref 5 Preset 3 Data Out D1 p 240 110 N A Data Out D2 p 241 111 N A The following examples are provided to show how the 1397 Drive interfaces with some of the available adapters These are only examples You should also refer to the appropriate manual for your gateway for additional information Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Using SCANport Capabilities D 7 SLC to SCANport Module The following figure shows how the I O image table for the SLC programmable controller relates to the 1397 Drive In this example the Drive is connected to channel 1 of the SLC module in enhanced mode If this were an example of basic mode only the O 1 2 O 1 3 I 1 2 and I 1 3 entries would be used Backplane SCANport SLC SLC to 1397 Drive SCANport Controller 1 0 Image Module Output Image Logic Command Logic Command Reference Reference Datalink A19 Data In A1 p 226 Datalink A29 Data In A2 p 227 Datalink B1 Data In B1 p 2
202. lator Board Hardware Jumper Settings Location of Recommended Value Tach V Scale P 180 Tach V Range P 181 Arm Fdbk Res P 183 Actual Setting NOTE If Feedback Type P 039 is not set to DC Tach or AC Tach the position of J11 and J14 is ignored Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 e Through the HIM check the current settings for J15 Reg Type P 182 J20 Fld Loss P 184 and J21 Field Supply P 185 in the Diagnostics menu If these settings are correct for your system you do not need to change them Record the settings in in Table 4 G Note Only check these parameters after entering the correct values for the parameters in the setup menu J11 J14 and J18 are calculated from the setup menu parameters When all parameter values and jumper settings are completed perform an EEPROM save Setting the Jumpers ATTENTION This equipment is at line voltage when A AC power is connected to the Drive Disconnect and lock out incoming power to the Drive before proceeding After power is removed verify with a voltmeter at power terminals 181 182 and 183 that no voltage exists before touching any internal parts of the Drive Failure to observe these precautions could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life power must be removed before changing any jumper connection Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION Unless explicitly stated
203. le armor as a ground is not adequate The conduit or cable armor and ground wires should be bonded to substation ground at both ends Each transformer enclosure and or frame must be bonded to ground at a minimum of two locations Motor Connection Each DC motor frame must be bonded to grounded building steel within 20 feet 6 meters of its location and tied to the drives Safety Ground via ground wires within the power cables and or conduit Bond the conduit or cable armor to ground at both ends The ground wire size and installation must be per NEC Article 250 Encoder Connections If used must be routed in grounded steel conduit The conduit must be grounded at both ends Ground the cable shield at the motor only See Figure 2 6 Tachometer Connections If used must be routed in grounded steel conduit The conduit must be grounded at both ends Ground the cable shield at the Drive end Only See Figure 2 6 CE Line Filter Connections For grounding reqirements in CE compliant applications refer to page B 8 in this manual CE AC Line Inductor Connections For grounding reqirements in CE compliant applications refer to page B 8 in this manual Figure 2 6 1397 Grounding Practices 2 9 Installation l SIGE EU Go Regulator Board Terminal Strip SPSS SVC Vggg SVSVSVC EVs ggg SYPSLSSVCgggg Control Ground
204. le or reset the contact is held at normally open until the drive software is initialized Make sure that this condition does not result in a dangerous situation for your application Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe bodily injury or loss of life If Normal Open is selected digital output 2 is open when the signal is off and closed when it is on If Normal Closed is selected digital output 2 is closed when the signal is off and open when it is on Freq Out Scale P 159 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed The frequency generated when the signal driving the frequency output is at full scale For example if Freq Out Source is set to Cur Lp Fdbk the frequency specified by this parameter is output when the armature current is at Maximum Current Maximum Current is used as the basis for current minor loop scaling Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Refererence Parameters kHz Configurable Output Config 250 0 kHz 2 0 kHz 250 0 kHz Freq Out Source P 160 Maximum Current P 040 OUTPUT CONFIG Programming Parameters 5 61 Freq Out Source P 160 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Selects the signal that drives the frequency output terminals 42 43 and 44 on the I O Expansion board When the frequency output is at its maximum value
205. leration may result which can cause overspeed of the motor Run tach amp encoder checks as detailed on pages 4 33 amp 4 34 Failure to observe this precaution could result in personal injury and or damage to equipment ATTENTION If encoder tachometer wiring is The following parameters MUST be TEMPORARILY lowered to 25 nominal to help guard against motor or equipment damage when running the following motor polarity checks Parameter Group Recommended Start Up Value Max Process Speed P 042 Setup 25 of Max Motor Speed Positive Current Limit P 067 Adv Setup 25 Positive Current Limit Source P 069 Adv Setup Register Negative Current Limit P 068 Adv Setup 25 Negative Current Limit Source P 070 Adv Setup Register Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Turn off and lock out all power to the Drive When checking motor polarity the Drive will have power applied and the motor will rotate The motor should be temporarily uncoupled from the load If the motor cannot be uncoupled from the load the following motor checks are recommended a All electrical connections are tight b The brushes are properly seated c The motor shaft is free to rotate Connect a DC Voltmeter to Terminal A1 and 45 at the output of the Drive Apply power to the Drive Rotate the motor in the direction required by the driven equipment using an externally applied mechanical force Measure the voltage pres
206. lication 1397 5 0 June 2001 G Ground System and Conduit Screen Termination B 10 Grounding Procedures 2 8 Grounding Requirements B 8 H Hidden Parameters 5 100 HIM Description 3 1 HIM Fault Display 6 2 HIM Operation 3 5 HIM Programming Steps 3 6 Installation 2 1 Internal Wiring Guidelines B 11 I O Inputs 24V 4 26 J Jumper and Adjustment Settings 4 21 Jumper Settings 4 20 L Lifting Angle Arrangement E 4 Lifting Component Ratings E 1 Logic Command Format D 12 Logic Inputs 1 7 Logic Outputs 1 7 Logic Status Format D 12 Logic Status Parameter D 1 Loss of Communications Fault D 5 M Motor and Feedback Polarity Checks 4 29 Motor Ground Check 4 6 Mounting 2 1 Mounting Environment 2 1 Mounting Hole Pattern E 2 Mounting the AC Line Filter B 4 Mounting the Drive B 4 N Numeric Parameter Table 5 6 O Options 1 10 P Parameter Alphabetical 5 97 Parameter Descriptions 5 14 Parameter Groups 5 2 Parameter Set Up 4 15 Pre Power Checks 4 6 Power On Checks 4 14 Power Ratings and Supply Capacity 1 6 Power Wiring Procedure 2 17 Pre Power Checks 4 6 Programming HIM 3 6 Programming Parameters 5 1 Pulse Encoder Polarity Checks 4 34 R Regulator Board Hardware Jumper Settings 4 20 Regulator Board Input Signals 2 31 Regulator Board Jumpers 4 25 Remote I O Communications Module D 10 S Safety Ground 2 8 SCANport Configuration D
207. lication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 55 OUTPUT CONFIG Anlg Out 2 Zero P 149 Removes any hardware introduced offset from the Analog 2 output signal at the regulator board terminal strip Anlg Out 3 Gain P 150 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Adjusts analog output 3 terminals 54 and 55 on the I O Expansion board to allow it to produce a signal from 5 0 to approximately 13 0 VDC Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Tunable Output Config 0 200 200 VDC Tunable Output Config 1 00 0 500 1 300 This is typically used to adjust the 10 V full scale output to match the input voltage requirement of attached equipment For example this parameter would be set to 0 800 to match the requirements of equipment that accepts a 0 to 8 VDC signal The outputs are only rated to 10 VDC so gain adjust values greater than 1 000 might cause the analog output circuit to saturate Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 56 Programming Parameters OUTPUT CONFIG Anlg Out 3 Src P 151 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Display Drive Units Numeric Text Selects the signal used to drive analog output Parameter Range 0 Cur Lp Fdbk 11 Arm Volt 3 terminals 54 and 55 on the I O Expansion 1 Cur Loop
208. lled the Preset Speed selection bits will override the reference selected by this input POWER A 24VDC supply is available at this pin COAST TO STOP Level sensitive input that causes a Coast Stop command Open Stop Closed NOT Stop The contactor is forced to open by hardware intervention i e hardware only making the motor coast to rest 1f Running This input is not maskable and is always active When the Coast to Stop input is open the Drive will be Not Ready If an optional Dynamic Braking DB kit is present the braking resistor is automatically applied when the contactor breaks the armature circuit CUSTOMER INTERLOCK Level sensitive input that causes a Coast Stop command 0 Stop 1 NOT Stop The contactor is forced to open through firmware making the motor coast to rest if Running The input allows external user interlock signals to be part of the Drive ready logic This input CANNOT be masked FAULT ALARM Clear Edge sensitive input that clears fault and or alarm indicator s 0 e amp 1 Clear The fault and alarm log entries are not affected This input can be masked through the Fault Reset Mask P 205 or Logic Mask P 207 parameters Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 34 Installation Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 TB 11 TB 12 TB 13 TB 14 TB 15 TB 16 17 TB 19 20 POWER A 24VDC supply is available at this pin MOTOR BRUSH WEAR Level sensitive input that cau
209. m 43 47 June 2001 Publication 1397 5 0 E 4 Lifting Instructions 3 Insert properly sized and rated lifting hooks into the top two 1 holes of the Drive chassis Figure E6 To limit pull in forces on the Drive the lifting devices connected to the hooks must be long enough to make the angle between the chain and a vertical line extending up from the cabinet edge less than 45 degrees as illustrated in Figure E6 NOTE 60 HP and smaller Drives do not have lift holes in the top of the Drive chassis If using hooks or lift eyes with these units place them in the handholds on the side of the cabinet Lift Drive into place over the top 3 bolts Verify that the bolt heads on the panel engage properly into the keyhole slots on the Drive Once the top bolts are properly seated the bottom bolts can be installed and tightened 6 Tighten all bolts to a torque of 22 6 N m 200 Ib in Figure E 6 Lifting Angle Arrangement Angle Must Be Less Than 45 gt Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Numbers 24V I O Inputs 4 26 24V Power Supply 2 14 A AC Line Connection 2 19 AC Line Filter Model Numbers B 3 AC Line Fuses 2 25 AC Line Torque Recomme
210. measuring device with a high voltage probe Contact Allen Bradley for recommendations L Hand tachometer used to monitor motor velocities LI HIM Programming Device Instruction Manual and reference manuals for any option used with the 1397 Drive Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 6 2 Troubleshooting HIM Fault Display Clearing a Fault Clearing an Alarm Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 used in the calculation of the burden resistor value Do not adjust change the value of this parameter from its factory set value unless you are replacing the regulator board Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment Refer to Chapter 5 if the CT Turns Ratio value needs to be changed from the factory supplied value ATTENTION The CT Turns Ratio Param 36 is The HIM LCD display is used to indicate a fault by displaying a fault code and fault number See Figure 6 1 Figure 6 1 Typical Fault Description Display Arm Overvoltage F 011 When a fault occurs in the 1397 the cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared After corrective action has been taken simply cycling Drive power will clear a fault NOTE The HIM and other SCANport peripherals can clear faults as well as the Fault Queue If a stop push button is used terminal 10 can also clear a fault When an alarm occurs in the 1397 the cause must be corrected before the alarm can be cleared After co
211. ming Parameters 5 29 ADV SETUP Arm Voltage Zero P 060 Used to remove any hardware introduced offset from the armature voltage signal In most cases this input will be set to zero volts Cur Loop K Fdbk P 061 Current Loop Feedback gain adjustment In most cases this input will be set for unity gain The range of this input may be affected by the software scaling factor calculated by the drive Typically it will be 1 000 Cur Lp Lead Freq P 062 Lead break frequency for the Current Loop Cur Loop Kp P 063 Proportional gain for the Current Loop Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Tunable Advanced Setup 0 200 200 overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause an who understands the significance of setting it Set the value of this parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to Observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Tunable Advanced Setup 1 000 1 000 1 100 RD S Tunable Advanced Setup 100 10
212. mum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value SEC Tunable Reference Set 0 1 sec or drive decel rate whichever is highest 1 0 sec 300 0 sec Tunable Reference Set 0 Off 0 Off 1 On Programming Parameters 5 35 REFERENCE SET Preset Speed 1 2 and 3 P 87 P 88 and P 89 These parameters set up to three preset Display Drive Units speed references when the Regulator Type Parameter Range jumper J15 on the regulator board is set for the speed voltage control loop or current Default Setting reference when J15 is set to current Parameter Type Group Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Ref 1 Source P 090 Selects the source of external reference 1 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value FLA 0 to Maximum Current FLA 150 FLA Tunable Reference Set RPM OR Min Process Speed to Max Process Speed RPM 250 RPM Tunable Reference Set 250 Min Process Speed Max Process Speed Numeric Text 0 Anlg In 1 1 Speed Pot 2 MOP Output 3 Anlg In 3 4 Anlg In 4 5 Frequency In 6 Adapter 1 7 Adapter 2 8 Adapter 3 9 Adapter 4 10 Adapter 5 11 Adapter 6 12 Preset 1 18 Preset 2 14 Preset 3 R amp
213. n the operation of the standard field supply Field economy cannot be disabled Fld Econ Ref P 274 Only available if the Field Current Regulator kit is installed The percentage of MOTOR FIELD AMPS P 510 set as a reference for field economy mode This parameter must be set above the FIELD LOSS THRESHOLD P 512 value to avoid field loss faults Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Degrees Tunable Field 0 84 180 Minutes Tunable Field 0 5 27 Tunable Field 0 70 100 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 88 Programming Parameters Fld Auto Weak P 275 Only used if the Field Current Regulator Kit is installed Enables or disables field weakening by the field control loop When it is disabled the field current PI block high limit is fixed at 180 If Feedback Select is set to Armature Volt this is automatically set to Disabled and cannot be changed Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Configurable Field 0 0 1 When Armature Voltage exceeds Fld Weaken Level and the field begins to weaken th
214. n a bundle may experience some Shields for cables from one cabinet to another must be connected at amount of EMI coupling and corresponding communication faults the source end cabinet Splicing of shielded cables if absolutely The application may dictate separate spacing necessary should be done so that shields remain continuous and 3 All wires of class 7 thru 11 MUST be shielded per the insulated from ground recommendations 4 Power wire is selected by load 16AWG is the minimum 4 In cable trays steel separators are advisable between the class recommended size for control wiring groupings 5 If conduit is used it must be continuous and composed of magnetic steel Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Motor Installation Power Wiring Procedure Installation 2 17 The following procedure provides the steps needed to properly install a DC motor for use with a 1397 Drive 1 Verify that the motor you intend to install is the appropriate rating for use with your model 1397 Drive 2 Install the DC motor in accordance with the motor manufacturer s installation instructions 3 Ensure that coupled applications have proper shaft alignment with the driven machine or that belted applications have proper sheave belt alignment to minimize unnecessary motor loading 4 Ifthe motor is accessible while it is running make certain all guards necessary to satisfy local and national codes are installed 5 Size the motor armature c
215. n bodily injury ATTENTION Before starting auto tuning it must be drives with motors that are mechanically coupled to one another through the process material However the Drive can be auto tuned with load applied and with inertia connected Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION Auto tuning must not be performed on if prior adjustments in Chapter 4 are not performed Perform all prior adjustment procedures contained in Chapter 4 before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION Auto tuning will not operate properly IMPORTANT Speed loop autotuning can only be performed on Drives with either pulse encoder feedback or analog tachometer feedback Current loop autotuning can be performed on Drives with encoder feedback analog tach feedback or which are armature voltage controlled This can also be performed if the Drive is configured as a current regulator J15 Current Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 36 Start Up and Adjustment Autotune Set Up Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 ATTENTION Current loop tuning applies power to the motor armature and will rotate any coupled process or load Potentially fatal voltages may be present at this time and danger of personal injury and or equipment damage may exist due to rotation of the coupled equipment Speed loop au
216. n isolation transformer or line reactors of similar impedance is required Also the Drives are designed Power Ratings and Supply for a maximum of three units per transformer 1 Maximum permissible available symmetrical RMS fault current Capacity 380 415VAC 380 415 380 415 Power Full Load Rated Full Load Rated Rated Source 380 VAC 415 VAC RMS AC Line DC Armature Field Capacity KW HP KW HP Current Amperes Current Amperes Current Amperes 1 8 2 4 2 1 2 8 10 7 10 5 000 9 12 10 3 13 6 26 29 10 5 000 17 9 24 20 6 27 6 48 55 10 5 700 35 8 48 41 2 55 2 94 110 15 11 500 89 5 120 102 9 138 226 265 15 25 000 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Drive UO Specifications Logic Inputs Logic Outputs Introduction 1 7 The following sections describe drive inputs and outputs Refer to Chapter 3 for terminal strip connections and wiring diagrams Logic Inputs to any of the 24 volt connections terminals 1 7 11 and 14 on the regulator board terminal strip will damage the drive Do not connect the external power source to the 24 volt connections on the regulator board terminal strip Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION Connecting an external power source The logic input circuits can be powered either from the in
217. n j o FUSE S6R INLY Oo TESI 9 O e Te H FRONT VIEW OF DRIVE WITHOUT DISCONNECT BOTTOM VIEW C_ DD 000 000000 qoooo noununnumq esche ie CONTROL GROUND POINT M6 With Lug Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 12 Installation Figure 2 9 Drive Ground Point Locations 150 HP at 230 VAC 300 HP at 460 VAC 10mm DIA Dee 45 A1 GROUND STUDS Located at back of chassis Located at back of chassis SOY o Of AS D CC e o o D e 9 Ge E S Y 4 Ee zi Ven Sadler 6 6 a z E D D loe e Q n A Oel e e La i zoe EHE P emia geo BL Ek CONTROL h_e SC aia L GROUND EN M Me eO STUD FRONT SIDE 10mm DIA GROUND STUD UUUUUTUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU ES
218. n possibly due to e Motor armature winding not connected or an open circuit e Blown inverting fault DC fuse e Inverting fault breaker tripped Check breakers and fuses Check motor armature windings Replace motor if necessary Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 6 4 Troubleshooting Fault No Fault Name Description Action 008 Motor Over Temp The motor thermostat is indicating a high temperature or if no motor thermostat is installed the customer terminal board pins 13 and 14 have not been jumpered correctly to inhibit this fault Other possible causes Include e Damaged thermostat or disconnected wiring e Inadequate ventilation e Blower Motor Malfunction Check filters blowers and thermostat e Incorrect blower rotation repairing or replacing as necessary e Blocked ventilation slots Replace thyristors if necessary e Clogged filters Check motor ventilation and provide e Excessive armature current additional air movement or cooling if e One or more thyristors inoperable necessary 009 Cntlr Over Temp The Controller thermostat is indicating an overtemperature condition possibly due to e Inadequate heat sink ventilation Check the fan and thermostat e Inadequate cabinet ventilation repairing or replacing as necessary e Heat sink fan malfunction Check cabinet amp heat sink ventilation e Damaged disconnected or improperly connected and provide additional air movement th
219. n speed will take proportionately Type Tunable ess time In proportional trim mode the actual time to deeg oe a accelerate will be modified by Draw Percent idoli n Out Refer to the Speed Reference Ramp Fig A 4 block diagram for additional information Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Parameters 5 23 SETUP Decel Time P 038 Selects the time it takes to decelerate from Max Motor Speed to 0 Smaller changes in speed take proportionately less time If Trim Mode Type is set to Proportional the actual time to decelerate might be modified by Draw Percentage Out Refer to the Speed Reference Ramp Block illustration A 4 for more information Feedback Type P 039 Selects the type of feedback signal that is used for the speed voltage loop 0 Arm Volt 1 DC Tach 2 Pulse Encoder 3 AC Tach Maximum Current P 040 The highest amount of current positive or negative for a given application This input is used as the basis of armature current scaling Maximum Current is limited to 20096 of Motor Arm Amps Max Motor Speed P 041 Max Motor Speed is the highest normal running speed of the motor This parameter scales the feedback device Max Motor Speed depends on several factors e f there is no field weakening the top speed is typically the same as the motor nameplate base speed e f there is field weakening the top speed is the same as the fi
220. nd zero have been applied Arm Volt P 005 Armature voltage value after all hardware and software scaling but before any IR compensation Actual Min Max values will be determined by Motor Arm Volts P 046 or Max Motor Speed P 041 Cur Loop Fdbk P 006 The Cur Loop Fdbk signal prior to the summing function Curr Loop Error P 007 The Curr Loop Error signal The difference between Cur Loop Ref and Cur Loop Fdbk Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value CNTS Metering Output 0 5369 5369 Volts Metering Tunable 0 675 675 AMPS Metering 2400 2400 AMPS Metering 3840 3840 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 16 Programming Parameters METERING Cur Loop Ref P 008 The amplitude and rate limited value of the selected Current Loop Reference Draw Percent Out P 009 Determined by the selected trim reference signal and Trim Range value Draw Percent Out is used as a multiplier in the proportional trim mode for accel and decel rates lt is also used to generate the Trim Output value Field Feedback
221. ndations 2 24 Air Conditioning C 2 Alarm Clearings 6 2 Alarm Conditions 6 7 Ambient Temperature Conditions C 1 Analog Inputs 1 8 Analog Outputs 1 8 Analog Tachometer Polarity Checks 4 33 Application Set Up 4 38 Autotune Execution 4 37 Autotune Set Up 4 36 C Cable Shielding Recommendations 2 15 Catalog Numbering Convention 1 3 Chassis Ground Connections 2 14 Chassis Ground Hardware Torque 2 14 Clearing a Fault 6 2 Clearing an Alarm 6 2 Configuring Field Supply 4 8 Configuring the SCANport Controls D 3 Control Connections 2 30 Control System Ground B 8 Index Control Transformer Tap Settings 4 3 Control Wiring Procedure 2 31 Cooling Airflow 2 2 D DC Armature Fuses 2 25 Derating for High Altitude C 2 DeviceNet Communications Module D 8 Disconnect 2 14 Drive Description 1 9 Drive Ground Point Locations 2 10 Drive Hardware Adjustments 4 3 Drive Mounting Dimensions 2 4 Dynamic Braking Kit B 13 E EMC Benign Kits B 12 EMC Compliance B 1 EMC Requirements B 1 Enclosure Mounting Minimum Clearances 2 3 Encoder Pulse and AC Tachometer Kits B 13 Enhanced Field Supply 4 9 Environment 2 1 External Wiring Guidelines B 10 F Fault Clearing 6 2 Fault Description Display 6 2 Fault Descriptions 6 3 Field Supply Configuration 4 8 Firmware Block Diagrams A 1 Flex I O Module D 10 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 1 2 Index Pub
222. nformation Record any changes made to the parameters for future reference during troubleshooting or tuning A User Parameter value chart is supplied in Appendix D Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 2 Programming Parameters Safety Precautions Parameter Groups METERING 1 Anlg In 1 pg 5 14 2 Anlg In 2 pg 5 14 3 Anlg In 3 pg 5 14 4 Anlg In 4 pg 5 15 5 Arm Volt pg 5 15 6 Cur Loop Fdbk pg 5 15 7 Cur Loop Error pg 5 15 8 Cur Loop Ref pg 5 16 9 Draw Percent Out pg 5 16 10 Field Feedback pg 5 16 11 Frequency In pg 5 16 12 Jog Ramp Output pg 5 17 13 Monitor 1 Output pg 5 17 14 Monitor 2 Output pg 5 17 15 MOP Output pg 5 17 16 OCL Enable TP pg 5 18 17 OCL Feedback pg 5 18 18 OCL Output pg 5 18 19 OCL Ramp Output pg 5 18 20 OCL Reference TP pg 5 18 21 Spd Loop Error pg 5 19 22 Spd Loop Fdbk pg 5 19 23 Spd Loop Lag Out pg 5 19 24 Spd Loop Output pg 5 19 25 Spd Loop Ref pg 5 20 26 Spd Src Output pg 5 20 27 Spd Ramp In TP pg 5 20 28 Spd Ramp Output pg 5 20 29 Speed Pot pg 5 21 30 Trim Output pg 5 21 31 Torque Reference pg 5 21 TP Test Point Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 damage are associated with many parameter settings ATTENTION Hazards of bodily injury or equipment You must read and observe specific precautions before changing any parameter Contact Rockwell Automation for assistance if you do not un
223. nimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 32 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 32 32 127 Numeric Text Alphanumeric Read amp Write Process Display 0 6 308 Numeric Text 9127 69 327 68 Read amp Write Process Display 32768 100 32767 Programming Parameters 5 85 Process Display Process 2 Text 1 P 259 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 2 Par and Process 2 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 2 of the display Process 2 Text 2 P 260 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 2 Par and Process 2 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 2 of the display Process 2 Text 3 P 261 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 2 Par and Process 2 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 2 of the display Process 2 Text 4 P 262 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 2 Par and Process 2 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 2 o
224. nimum Value Maximum Value uSEC Output Diagnostics 0 6480 6480 RPM N A Diagnostics 0 4095 4095 DEG Diagnostics Read Only 0 5400 5400 Numeric Text 0 Not Active 1 Active Read Only Diagnostics 0 0 1 Programming Parameters 5 65 DIAGNOSTICS Field Ref TP P 176 Field current reference testpoint It is the limited value of Field Reference or the field economy reference when Field Econ Active is On Refer to the Field Control Loop Dia A 10 block diagram for additional information Field Regulator P 177 Indicates whether or not the Field Current Regulator kit is installed If it is installed lists the rating of the kit that is installed Expansion 1 0 P 178 Indicates whether or not the I O Expansion kit is installed in the drive and if it has passed diagnostics If the I O Expansion Kit has failed diagnostics the drive is not operable the armature cannot become active IR Comp TP P 179 An output testpoint that represents the level of IR Comp being used by the drive This parameter only has meaning if the selected drive feedback is set to armature voltage Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Range Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maxim
225. ny insulating coatings such as varnish or paint This establishes a good ground plane for the mounted equipment Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 B 2 CE Conformity The degree of enclosure does not play a significant role in the containment of RF emissions The cabinet can have ventilation louvers or openings for fans and filters None of these openings however can be located within a zone 10 inches above and below the height of the Drive as shown in Figure B 1 Selecting an AC Line Filter AC line filters limit the conducted electromagnetic emissions to the AC power mains from the 1397 Drives Tables B A thru B C list the 1397 Drives full load amps inductance and the AC Line Filter model number required for each Drive The inductance is the minimum input inductance for 2 impedance assuming a 5 to 6 source impedance Table B A AC Line Filter Model Numbers 1 5 to 150HP 230 VAC AC Full Minimum Inductance AC Line Filter HP Rating Load Amps in microhenries uH Model Number 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 3DF4353 470 340 iiid 255 135 80 105 3DF4357 90 55 45 3DF4359 226 38 370 23 Two 3DF4359 filters 443 19 connected in parallel Table B B AC Line Filter Model Numbers 8 8 89 7 kW 380VDC 2 1 1029 kW O 415 VAC AC Full Minimum Inductance AC Line Filter Amp Rating HP Rating Load Amps in microhenries uH Model Number 7 o PT 3DF4353 29 3DF4354 55 Eee 3DF4355 1
226. o A2 Armature Bridge P 171 Shows which armature bridge in the drive is currently active Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Selection Tunable Diagnostics Forward Forward Off Reverse On Numeric Text 0 Forward 1 Reverse Output Diagnostics 0 Forward 0 Forward 1 Reverse Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 64 Programming Parameters DIAGNOSTICS Armature Delta P 172 Shows the actual firing angle in us Cur Compound TP P 173 An output testpoint that represents the current compounding value being used by the drive Field Delta P 174 The firing angle of the output of the field current regulator to the regulated field supply gate firing circuit Output of the field current Pl block Fld Econ Active P 175 Indicates the present state of field economy mode Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Mi
227. oard Board Terminal Strip FIELD POWER SUPPLY FIELD CONTROL CE Line 1 Inductor MOTOR FIELD DIGITAL SPEED MOTOR ANALOG ee ARMATURE FREQUENCY SELECTION INPUTS OUTPUTS AND ANALOG SCALING Armature Ke Ge PULSE eedbac ENCODER Armature Voltage Feedback OUTER CONTROL Speed Feedback LOOP OCL Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 1 10 Options Introduction Name Description I M Number 115 VAC Control Interface Converts customer supplied 115 V AC signals to 24 V DC for operating a 1397 5 18 All Horsepowers 1397 Mounts separately on the panel or can be mounted in the bottom of a NEMA Type 1 enclosed drive 230 V AC Conversion Allows conversion of the 460 V AC 1397 to a 230 V AC 1397 at one half 1397 5 16 the 460 VAC horsepower rating A C Line Disconnect Allows the three phase line to be disconnected at the drive Molded 1397 5 11 3 60 HP 460V case switch that mounts on the chassis of the drive or NEMA Type 1 1 30HP 230V enclosure 7 100A 380 415VAC Dynamic Braking Provides the hardware including braking grids needed to provide 1397 5 15 dynamic braking on stop Supplied in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure The 1397 DB A and 1397 DB B series allow the kit to be panel mounted These kits include the resistor grid assembly and contactor The customer must supply fused 115 V AC Enhanced Field Supply Provides electronic field trim field econom
228. ock Diagrams Analog Output 1 CTB 24 CTB 25 Analog Output 2 CTB 26 CTB 25 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 A 12 Firmware Block Diagrams Figure A 12 Level Detectors CML FEEDBACK CUR LP FEEDBACK 8 sample average From Speed Loop Block Diagram SPD Lp Fdbk MONITOR 1 SPD RAMP OUT From Speed Reference Ramp Block Diagram SPD RAMP IN COMPARE Sasih MONITOR 1 OUTPUT From Speed Trim Ref MONITOR 1 Block Diagram Select Block Diagram BE LEVEL TIMER to 1 O Expansion Outputs MONITOR 1 DELAY Delay Time CML FEEDBACK 8 sample average CUR LP FEEDBACK From Speed Loop Block Diagram 1 SPD Lp Fdbk MONITOR 2 SPD RAMP OUT From Speed Reference Ramp Block Diagram 2 SPD RAMP IN COMPARE Start Stop MONITOR 2 OUTPUT From Speed Trim Ref Select Block Diagram MONITOR 2 Block Diagram LEVEL TIMER to I O Expansion Outputs SPD SRC OUT MONITOR 2 DELAY Delay Time Default Selection Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Digital Outputs n 1 2 n Monitor 1 Out From Level Detector Block Diagram n Monitor 2 Out From Internal Drive Signals Analog amp Frequency Outputs IN CUR LIMIT DRIVE READY CUR LP FEEDBACK From Current Minor CUR LOOP REF Loop Block Diagram CML ERROR SPD LP FDBK SPD LP REF From Speed Loop Block Diagram SPD LP ERROR SPD LOOP OUT SPD RAMP OUT From Speed Reference Ramp Block Diagram SPD RAMP IN
229. on 1397 5 0 July 2005 P N 179896 P02 Supersedes June 2001 Copyright O 2005 Rockwell Automation All rights reserved Printed in USA
230. onvention regenerative or non regenerative type line voltage etc can be determined by the Drive model number The model number structure 1s shown below 1397 B005 OPTIONS i B 005 R OPTIONS First Position Second Position Third Position Fourth Position Fifth Position Bulletin Number Voltage Rating Type 1397 Letter Voltage Rating HP kW N Non Regen A 230V AC 001 1 5 1 1 R Regen DS 002 2 1 5 MB 003 3 2 2 L10 005 5 3 7 L11 007 7 5 5 8 DB 010 10 7 5 FS2 015 15 11 FS3 020 20 15 PE 025 25 18 AC 030 30 22 040 40 29 HAB 050 50 37 HAP 060 60 44 HA1 075 75 55 HA2 100 100 74 125 125 93 1203 GD1 150 150 111 1203 GD2 U 380 415V AC ADC 380 415 1203 GK1 7 2 4 1 8 2 8 2 1 1203 GK2 29 12 9 13 8 10 3 1203 GKS 55 24 17 9 27 6 20 8 110 48 35 8 55 2 41 2 265 120 89 5 138 102 9 NOTE Refer to page 1 4 for additional option 460V AC 008 3 2 2 information f 005 5 3 7 007 7 5 5 6 010 10 7 5 015 15 11 020 20 15 025 25 18 030 30 22 040 40 29 050 50 37 060 60 44 075 75 55 100 100 74 125 125 93 150 150 111 200 200 149 250 250 186 300 300 224 400 400 298 500 500 373 600 600 448 1 Regen R required for reversing applications Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 1 4 Introduction 1397 OPTIONS CONTROL OPTIONS DS ACLine Disconnect MB Blower Motor Starter L10 Control Interface 115VAC L1
231. ory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Tunable Input Config 1 00 0 750 2 250 Numeric Input Config 0 200 200 To adjust the zero point make small changes to this parameter until Anlg In 4 P 004 equals zero while the signal at terminals 52 and 53 is at its minimum 0 V Freq In Scale P 137 Only available if the I O Expansion kit is installed Specifies the maximum input frequency This is the frequency that corresponds to a full scale value For example if the frequency input will be used as the speed loop reference this input frequency would correspond to Max Motor Speed P 041 because Max Motor Speed is the basis for speed loop scaling Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value kHz Configurable Input Config 250 0 kHz 2 0 kHz 250 0 kHz Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 50 Programming Parameters INPUT CONFIG Freq In Zero P 138 Only used if the I O Expansion kit is installed Specifies the minimum input frequency This is the frequency that corresponds to a value of zero If the input frequency drops below the frequency specified by this input parameter the resulting digital value remains zero it will not go negative Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default
232. ot be triggered on power up It only occurs when maximum or minimum speed has changed Verify that these parameter values are correct for your application 700 NV Mem Save Fail An attempt to save information parameter values fault log data etc to retentive memory failed The drive may continue to be operated A possible cause of this error is a Regulator Board Malfunction Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Appendix A Firmware Block Diagrams Figure A 1 Standard Inputs Anl Anl ANALOG e in Ze int Gain Max Motor Speed INPUTS P 128 P 129 P 127 P 041 Analog Input 1 To Any Switch CTB 19 SOFTWARE SCALING Selection CTB 20 Labeled ANLG IN 1 MAX MOTOR SPEED Anlg In 1 Type Max Motor Speed P 128 0 DRAW PERCENT OUT Max Motor Speed P 041 Max Process Analog Max Process Min Process Speed In2 Zero Speed pe P 042 P 131 P 042 q Speed Pot Analog Input 2 P029 To Speed Trim E SCAUNG MAXIMIN Reference Block CTB 28 SPD SCALING 1 10V CTB 16 Diagram labeled SPEED POT Anlg In 2 Ang We To Any Switch P 130 Selection Labeled ANLG IN 2 1 3 J19 must be set to POT 2 3 to use the internal 10V power supply Default Selection Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 A 2 Firmware Block Diagrams Figure A 2 I O Expansion Inputs Digital Inputs n 1 5 n 1 CTB 59 Preset Speed Select B n 2 CTB 60
233. otor field polarity in Table 4 B as terminated at terminals F1 and F2 of the field terminal strip Figures 4 7 amp 4 8 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 12 Start Up and Adjustment Figure 4 7 DC Motor Field Connection Location 1 5 30 HP at 230 VAC 7 110A 380 415 VAC 3 60 HP at 460 VAC pem Em DC Motor Armature Connection SS A 45 MEM B DC Motor Field DB Connections Connection Jejejejejelej 1e Ye ale SES eE e Go Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Start Up and Adjustment 4 13 Figure 4 8 DC Motor Field Connection Location Tele lie lTelt O 6 AO EE EE 4FU SFU 6FU eu 8FU TOP VIEW 40 75HP at 230 VAC DB CONNECTIONS 265A Q 380 415 VAC KT ONL SEE DC MOTOR PELD 75 150 HP at 460 VAC
234. otor s field windings the output voltage must be adjusted so that it doesn t exceed the rated motor field voltage This procedure is described in the Enhanced Field Supply Kit Installation manual Publication 1397 5 12 Figure 4 5 Enhanced Field Supply ATTENTION It is imperative that the Drive NOT AN BE STARTED with the field windings in the un powered condition Failure to follow these procedures may result in a machine malfunction and or personal injury The output voltage and current of both the enhanced field supply and the regulated field supply are determined by the values contained in set up parameters Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 10 Start Up and Adjustment Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Regulated Field Supply The Regulated Field Supply Fig 4 6 allows the motor to run above base speed i e to operate in the constant horsepower range by weakening the motor field current Prior to applying the regulated field supply output to the DC motor s field windings the output current must be adjusted so that it does not exceed the rated motor field current This procedure is described in the Regulated Field Supply Kit Installation manual Publication 1397 5 17 Figure 4 6 Regulated Field Supply Terminations 13 eck o lt LA oO A
235. oup Volts Feedback Type P 039 Arm Volt Feedback Type selects the type of feedback signal that is used for the Setup Group speed voltage loop Encoder can be selected only if a pulse tachometer kit is installed Feedback Type causes the Neg Current Lim step 16 to be set to 0 and Reverse Disable step 4 to be set to On if e AC Tach is selected e Pulse Tach is selected and Encoder Quad is set Off Anlg Tach P 047 18 This parameter only needs to be set if Feedback Type was set to AC V 1000 V 1000 Tach or DC Tach Setup Group RPM Anlg Tach V 1000 is the analog tachometer scaling from the tachometer nameplate in volts per 1000 RPM Units are volts DC for DC tachometers or volts AC RMS for AC tachometers This parameter might be limited to less than 200 0 volts 1000 so that voltage from the tachometer will not be more than 250 V ATTENTION Failure to set the Analog Tach Voltage range correctly can cause an overspeed condition Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 18 Parameter Modification Sequence cont Parameter Name Par No Start Up and Adjustment Default Description User Setting Encoder PPR Setup Group P 048 18 PPR This parameter only needs to be set if Feedback Type was set to Encoder Encoder PPR sets the pulse tachometer pulses per revolution PPR from the pulse tachometer nameplate ATTENTION The incorrect setting of the Encod
236. our Drive Configuration procedures will vary depending on field supply type ATTENTION Field Supply configuration must be checked while making the Pre Power Checks If your Drive uses either the optional Enhanced Field Supply or the Regulated Field Supply different configuration procedures are required than with the Standard Field Supply Power should not be applied to the motor field windings prior to adjusting these parameters as outlined in the respective field supply s installation manual Failure to properly configure your field supply could cause the motor to run at excessive speed or damage the motor which could result in personal injury or destruction of equipment Standard Field Supply See Note Below If the Standard Field Supply Fig 4 4 is installed adjustment is not necessary Figure 4 4 Standard Field Supply Terminations 582 583 581 E Si gt 77 gt gt o 0 Al S SP4 z O 13 O eg CJ F1 35 PT NY Note Regulated Field Supply is provided as standard on 230V Drives with ratings above 45 kW 60 Hp 460V Drives with ratings above 112 kW 150 Hp 380 415V Drives with ratings above 35 8 kW 48 Hp Start Up and Adjustment 4 9 Enhanced Field Supply The Enhanced Field Supply Fig 4 5 allows adjustment of the field voltage through hardware jumper settings and parameter adjustment Prior to applying the Enhanced Field Supply output to the DC m
237. ower supply or an external 10 V source is used for Analog Reference 2 To use the 10V power supply for the Analog Reference 2 potentiometer place the jumper on pins 2 and 3 Pot The supply at terminal 16 of the regulator board terminal strip is used To use an external 10 V source place the jumper on pins 1 and 2 Ext The external reference is connected at terminals 17 and 18 of the regulator board terminal strip NOTE This input can be used as a trim on the auto mode speed reference by setting the jumper on pins 1 and 2 EXT In this case a 10 V range can be used Setting the Voltage Range and Scale of an Analog Tachometer Jumpers J14 and J11 The Tach V Range 314 and Tach V Scale J11 jumpers set the voltage range and scale of the analog tachometer NOTE These jumpers are ignored if an analog tach is not used and if Feedback Type P 039 is not set to DC Tach or AC Tach Note Jumper J14 determines which terminal is used for tach connection Refer to Figure 4 15 for a tach installation illustration Table 4 H details tach terminations for Lo or Hi speed operation ATTENTION The Drive can overspeed if jumper J14 A is set incorrectly or the tach is wired incorrectly Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment Table 4 H Regulator Board Terminal Strip Tach Terminations Terminal Terminal Hi Range 21 23 Common Lo Range 22 23 Common Durin
238. p 233 Logic Status p 190 Spd Loop Fabk p 022 Data Out A1 p 234 Data Out A2 p 235 Data Out B1 p 236 Data Out B2 p 237 Data Out C1 p 238 Data Out C2 p 239 Data Out D1 p 240 Data Out D2 p 241 1397 Drive Logic Command Reference Logic Status Spd Loop Fabk p 22 Using SCANport Capabilities D 11 Supported SCANport Messages The 1397 Drive supports the following SCANport messages The formats and methods to use these messages vary depending on the type of gateway used Not all gateways support messaging or all message types Consult your gateway manual s or application notes when determining the level for any gateway This Message Lets you Scattered Parameter Value Read Read a scattered list of parameters Scattered Parameter Value Write Write to a scattered list of parameters and return the status of each parameter Read Product Number Request the product number from a device Product Text String Read Request the product text from a device Last Parameter Number Read Request the last parameter number EE Command Write Activate the specified EE function Read Full Parameter Request all known attributes for the requested parameters Parameter Value Read Request the value for a specific parameter Parameter Value Write Write a value to a specific parameter Fault Command Write Clear faults clear the fault queue and reset Fault Queue
239. parameter the control function is disabled If a bit is set 1 the control function is enabled Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Setting the Loss of Communications Fault Using SCANport Capabilities D 5 You can specify how you want to be notified if SCANport loses the connection to a port If you want a communications Then loss to be Reported as a fault Set appropriate bit in LogicMask p 207 corresponding to the SCANport device number or set Control Logic to enabled Data In D1 Par 232 Data Out D1 Par 240 Ignored Clear appropriate bit in Logic Mask p 207 corresponding to the SCANport device number or set Control Logic disabled The following table specifies which bit represents a device To specify this device Set this bit SCANport device 1 1 SCANport device 2 2 SCANport device 3 3 SCANport device 4 4 SCANport device 5 5 SCANport device 6 6 For Example If you want a fault condition reported when communication is lost with device 3 you need to set bit 3 of Logic Mask NOTE When a device is configured to NOT cause a fault upon disconnection this device cannot control any functions in the Drive Using the SCANport UO The SCANport I O image provides the interface between the Image SCANport devices and the Drive The SCANport I O image is used to transfer realtime data in the same way as the PLC image is used The devices on SCANport allocate the SCANport I O imag
240. put that represents the jog reference value immediately after the jog ramp function Monitor 1 Output P 013 Shows the present state of the respective monitor On Off Monitor 2 Output P 014 Shows the present state of the respective monitor On Off MOP Output P 015 The output of the motor operated potentiometer MOP Refer to the MOP Accel Time input parameter and block diagram for additional information Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Parameter Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value RPM Metering Read Only 0 5000 5000 Enum Text Metering 0 0 Off 1 On Enum Text Metering 0 0 Off 1 On RPM Metering Read Only 0 5000 5000 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 18 Programming Parameters METERING OCL Enable TP P 016 The status of the outer control loop OCL Off indicates the OCL is disabled or held in reset the drive is not running On Enabled means it is operating OCL Feedback P 017 The feedback value of the outer control loop Refer to the Outer Control Loop Fig A 5 block diagram for additional information OCL Output P 018 The output of the out
241. r personal injury Record Data To assist with Start Up the information listed in the Pre Power Checklist Table must be recorded This information includes e Drive Nameplate Data e Motor Nameplate Data e Tach Encoder Data if applicable e Field Supply Type e Installed drive options such as AC line disconnects dynamic braking etc IMPORTANT Record all Regulator Board amp Option jumper settings for future reference when replacing parts Start Up and Adjustment 4 7 Table AA Pre Power Checklist DRIVE NAMEPLATE DATA Catalog Number M N Ser AC Input vols ______ Amps DC Output Vots _____ Amps DC Field oo Vots _ lt i ApS Short Circuit Rating Amps HP MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Type HP RPM Arm Volts Amps Field Volts Amps Wound Type Frame TACHOMETER ENCODER NAMEPLATE DATA Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Type Rated Supply Voltage encoder only Volts Rated Output Voltage Encoder Volts square wave Encoder Pulse per Revolution PPR DC Tach Voltsat Ss RPM OPTION NAMEPLATE DATA Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Type FIELD SUPPLY DATA Volts Type Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 8 Start Up and Adjustment Field Supply Configuration Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Verify which shunt field supply has shipped with y
242. rameter This input CANNOT be masked Both the customer interlock And Coast to Stop must be made for the Drive to be READY Figure 2 22 Terminal Strip Inputs gt Qu 24V Lo Q 2 Run RUN STOP He 3 Stop by user OH a4 Jog contact E Q 5 Reverse Forward 1 lana RES f 6 Reference Select a m Q 1 24v 3 2 a 8 Coast to Stop x ekke 9 Customer Interlock SS 3 10 Fault Alarm Reset a Qin 24V 12 Brush Wear leg 13 Motor Thermostat 4 24V 5 PLC End 5 24V Common efer to Pub 1397 5 0 for Additional Information 1 D hel 10V Isolated Analog Reference 2 Qm Y Q 18 Analog Reference 1 q pol Da gt 1 High Range Analog Tachometer n gt 22 Low Range s 2B Common 2 gt All customer interlock contacts must be closed for drive operation AA Regulator Board Terminal Strip Inputs MAN 3 gt The circuit breaker is supplied with lt Da Analog Out 1 200 300 HP regenerative drives amp 225 Analog Out Common Note that if any other interlocks are Y required for your application they lt lt q Analog Out 2 must be connected in series with lt Del the circuit breaker contact to the Run customer interlock input lt 23 pe l Alarm Required for initial startup and amp a0 operational checks Voltage must be present at these amp 28
243. rated Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value RD S Tunable Advanced Setup 1 00 0 01 69 81 Numeric Text O Lag 1 Bypass Bypass Tunable Advanced Setup 1 0 1 RD S Tunable Advanced Setup 3 00 rad sec 0 rad sec 141 37 rad sec Tunable Advanced Setup 4 40 0 10 128 0 Degrees Configuration Advanced Setup 109 0 127 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 34 Programming Parameters REFERENCE SET MOP Accel Time P 084 Only available if the I O Expansion kit is installed Time in which the motor operated potentiometer MOP output can change from zero to Max Motor Speed The MOP function provides a manual reference to the speed voltage loop when the MOP output is selected Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value SEC Tunable Reference Set 0 1 sec or drive accel rate whichever is highest 1 0 sec 300 0 sec The Mop Output is increas
244. rcent shown depends on motor operating speed and frame size Power Ratings Displacement Power Factor 88 typical rated load and speed Note Typical percent shown depends on motor operating speed and frame size Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 1 6 Introduction Power Ratings and Supply Capacity 230 460VAC Full Load Rated Full Load Rated Power Source RMS AC Line DC Armature Rated Field Current Capacity 1 Minimum Current Amperes Current Amperes Amperes Amperes Source HP 230 VAC 460 VAC 240 VDC 500 VDC 150 VDC 300 VDC 230 VAC 460 VAC kVA 1 5 10 7 10 5000 4 2 11 9 10 5000 5 3 13 10 12 6 10 10 5000 5000 6 5 19 12 20 10 10 10 5000 5000 7 5 75 26 15 29 14 10 10 5000 5000 11 10 33 18 38 19 10 10 5000 5000 15 15 48 24 55 27 10 10 5000 5000 20 20 63 31 73 35 15 10 10000 5000 27 25 80 39 93 45 15 10 10000 5000 34 30 94 45 110 52 15 10 10000 5000 40 40 125 63 146 73 15 15 25000 10000 51 50 154 74 180 86 15 15 25000 10000 63 60 186 86 218 100 15 15 25000 10000 75 75 226 110 265 129 15 15 25000 25000 93 100 307 143 360 167 15 25000 118 125 370 177 434 207 15 25000 145 150 443 213 521 250 15 25000 175 200 281 330 15 30000 220 250 351 412 15 30000 275 300 421 495 15 30000 330 400 567 667 15 75000 440 500 680 800 15 75000 550 600 816 960 15 75000 660 ATTENTION When applying 1397 Drives to a power distribution system with KVA capacity in excess of five times the smallest drive rating the use of a
245. rectly written during PLC operation Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 80 Programming Parameters Adapter UO Data Out A1 P 234 This parameter displays the parameter number whose value will be written into the PLC input data table during PLC operation Data Out A2 P 235 This parameter displays the parameter number whose value will be written into the PLC input data table during PLC operation Data Out B1 P 236 This parameter displays the parameter number whose value will be written into the PLC input data table during PLC operation Data Out B2 P 237 This parameter displays the parameter number whose value will be written into the PLC input data table during PLC operation Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Group Type Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units
246. red as a type 1 position regulator this should be set to Bypass For a type 2 position regulator the lead lag block can be used if necessary Refer to the OCL Lead Lag Freq parameter and block diagram for additional information OCL Kp P 294 The proportional gain of the outer control loop PI block Refer to the OCL Lead Freq block diagram for additional information Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text 2 to 20 10 Tunable Process Pl 2 10 20 Numeric Text 0 Lead Lag 1 Bypass 2 Lag Lead Tunable Process PI 0 1 2 Tunable Process Pl 0 10 2 0 128 00 Programming Parameters 5 93 Process Pl OCL Lead Freq P 295 The lead break frequency of the proportional integral PI block of the outer control loop Ifthe OCL is configured as a type 1 position regulator set equal to 0 00 proportional only OCL RAMP OUTPUT GC To OCL Block Diagram OCL Pos Limit P 296 Outer Control Loop PI block positive limit The output of OCL PI block is never above this limit Refer to the Outer Control Loop block diagram Fig
247. reverse direction Nominal AC Freq P 050 The nominal AC line frequency typically 50 or 60 Hz Nominal AC Volt P 051 The nominal AC line RMS voltage AutoTune Type P 052 When the Drive is Ready this parameter allows selection of the Auto Tune Mode After selection is made pressing Run will start the tuning mode Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Enums Hz Configurable Setup 60 48 62 VAC Configurable Setup 230 200 575 Numeric Text Configurable Setup 0 0 amp 0 None 1 Current Spd 2 Current Loop 3 Spd Loop Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 28 Programming Parameters ADV SETUP Anlg Tach Gain P 057 Used to scale the analog tachometer feedback signal after it has been conditioned by the drive hardware Typically it will be 1 000 Anlg Tach Zero P 058 Used to remove any hardware introduced offset from the analog tachometer feedback signal Typically adjustment will be 20 to 20 Arm Voltage Gain P 059 Used to scale the armature voltage signal after it has been conditioned by the drive hardware In most cases this input will be 1 000 Publication 1397 5 0 J
248. ring Steel Conduit Tray G t Category Class Signal Definition Signal Examples Cable Type 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Notes Power i AC Power 600V or greater 234 aPh AC Les per NEC amp Local Codes o 39 379 ans Nore 125 M DC Power SS e 36 3 12 Note 1s BELT RN rones orice tc Control 115V AC DC Logic Relay Logic PLC I O per NEC amp Local Codes Motor Thermostat 3 9 3 6 Note 6 1 2 5 115V AC Power Power Supplies Instruments m 24V AC DC Logic PLC I O per NEC amp Local Codes Analog Signals Reference Feedback Shielded Cable Belden weer gem Signal EP Supplies Ee 5to24V DC 8735 8737 8404 Ge Process Dia ow speed low speed me high speed Pulse Tach 9728 9730 Serial RS 232 422 to Shielded Cable Belden Communication Terminals Printers RS 232 8735 8737 Signal RS 422 9729 9730 Note 6 1 3 greater than 20k baud PLC Data Highwa 9463 A B 1770 CD Example Spacing relationship between 480V AC incoming power leads and 24V DC logic leads LEGEND 480V AC leads are Class 2 24V DC leads are Class 6 2 3 4 Class Spacing For separate steel conduits the conduits must be 3 inches 76 mm apart Ina cable tray the two groups of leads are to be 6 inches 152 mm apart 3 9 Steel Conduit Tray Spacing Notes 1 Both outgoing and return current carrying conductors are to be pulled 6 Spacing of communication cables classes 2 thru 6 is in same conduit or laid adjac
249. ro at powerup Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Default Setting Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value 96 Tunable Process Pl 0 0 0 0 100 0 Numeric Text 0 Enable 1 Disable Disable Tunable Process Pl 0 1 1 Cnts 4095 0 Tunable Process Pl 0 4096 4095 Programming Parameters 5 97 Parameters Alphabetical This table provides an alphabetized list of 1397 parameters with the associated page number reference for full parameter descriptions Name No See Page Name No See Page Accel Time 037 5 22 AutoTune Type 052 5 27 AC Line Period 192 5 69 AutoTune Stablty 114 5 44 AC Line Voltage 193 5 70 CPU Loading 198 5 71 Alarm Reset 197 5 71 Current Compound 101 5 38 Anlg In 3 Gain 132 5 48 Current Compound TP 173 5 64 Anlg In 3 Type 133 5 48 Curr Loop Error 007 5 15 Anlg In 3 Zero 134 5 49 Cur Loop Fdbk 006 5 15 Anlg In 4 Gain 135 5 49 Cur Loop K Fdbk 061 5 29 Anlg In 4 Zero 136 5 49 Cur Lp Lead Freq 062 5 29 Anlg In 1 001 5 14 Cur Loop Kp 063 5 29 Anlg In 2 002 5 14 Cur Loop RateLim 064 5 30 Anlg In 3 003 5 14 Cur Loop Ref 008 5 16 Anlg In 4 004 5 15 CT Turns Ratio 036 5 22 Anlg In 1 Gain 12
250. rrective action has been taken perform the following steps to clear the alarm 1 In the Control Status menu cycle to the Alarm Queue using the increment and decrement key 2 Press Enter 3 Press the Increment or Decrement key until Clear Queue is displayed The alarm queue is now cleared Troubleshooting 6 3 Table 6 A 1397 Fault Descriptions Fault No Fault Name Description Action 001 IET Overcurrent Armature current instantaneously exceeded 180 of Maximum Current P 040 Possibly due to e Incorrect armature current feedback scaling Check the motor and all thyristors e One or more thyristors not operating Ensure that armature current e Improper Current Minor Loop tuning feedback scaling is correct Replace e Motor Armature winding damaged the motor if necessary 002 Tachometer Loss Tachometer feedback signal missing possibly due to e Tach coupling broken or loose e Disconnected loose or damaged tach wires e Pulse Tach supply voltage low e Incorrect Analog Tach scaling e Incorrect Pulse Tach configuration Check the tach coupling tach scaling e Motor armature winding not connected or open circuit tach configuration fuses and motor e Blown DC fuse armature windings Relplace the tach e Tach malfunction and or motor if necessary 003 Overspeed Fault Motor Speed exceeded 110 of Max Motor Speed P 041 possibly due to e Incorrect tach scaling e Blown field supply fuses e Improp
251. rt Capabilities Lifting Instructions Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Appendix D Chapter Objectives cca sccoaverectesentacuseauecne EG D 1 Logic Status Parameter D 1 Configuring the SCANport Controls D 3 Setting the Loss of Communications Fault D 5 Using the SCANport VO Image D 5 Supported SCANport Messages D 11 Logic Status EE D 12 Logic Command Format 0 0 00 e cece ee eee D 12 User Parameter Value Table oooooooooom o D 13 Appendix E inier ero erc m E 1 Lifting Component Ratings E 1 Drive Mega Sg AR AER Ae E PEE tase RES Ei Manual Objectives Chapter 1 Introduction The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the necessary information to install program start up and maintain the 1397 DC Drive This manual should be read in its entirety before operating servicing or initializing the 1397 Drive This manual must be consulted first as it will reference other 1397 manuals for option initialization This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for setting up and servicing the 1397 DC Drive You must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of electrical terminology programming procedures required equipment and safety precautions as typical applications will consist of a properly rated DC motor with or without feedback based on performance requirements and the 1397 ATTENTION Only qualified electrical per
252. run as shown in Figure B 8 Figure B 8 Dressing Power and Control Wires 3 Phase DC Field AC o 8 Armature Control amp Signal Control Panel a OD 000 Conductive Surface 777 4 LE SOOO AC Line Filter d When the AC power leads must leave the ground plane of the mounting panel to make connection to elevated device terminals a ground wire should be run with that wire bundle Refer to Figures B 10 and B 11 for typical panel electrical layouts Wiring the AC Line Filter The line filter is connected in series from the AC supply line to the AC line inductor to the input terminals in the Drive as shown in Figure B 9 AC power wiring from the electrical cabinet power entry to the line filter must be As short as possible e Separated from any other wiring to prevent coupling high frequency noise back to the filtered leads e Run as close to the ground plane as possible Figure B 9 AC Line Filter Inductor and 1397 Drive Se e Allen Bradley PERRAS s Een AC Line m Inductor ean y Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 B 12 CE Conformity Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Wiring the AC Line Inductor Install the Line Inductor between the line filter and the AC power input of the 1397 Drive as shown in Figure B 9 Wiring the Motor Field and armature circuit wiring that is internal to the electrical cabinet must be
253. s with V 1 XX or greater firmware These parameters are for future expansion of functions in the Drive and have no effect on Drive operation These parameters are neither visible nor accessible through the HIM When using DriveTools or DeviceNet manager however all parameters can be seen even ones marked as hidden While visible they are not functional Hidden Parameter Name No Hidden Parameter Name No Metering 1 032 ourcras 165 Metering 2 033 MASKS 1 209 Metering 3 034 MASKS 2 210 Metering 4 035 MASKS 3 211 Setup 2 053 MASKS 4 212 Setup 3 054 MASKS 5 213 Setup 4 055 OWNERS 2 222 Setup 5 056 OWNERS 3 223 Metering 5 065 OWNERS 4 224 ADV SETUP 2 080 ADAPT IO 1 242 ADV SETUP 3 081 ADAPT 10 2 243 ADV SETUP 4 082 ADAPT IO 3 244 ADV SETUP 5 083 ADAPT IO 4 245 REF SETUP 2 095 ADAPTIO 5 246 REF SETUP 3 096 PROC DISP 1 267 REF SETUP 4 097 PROC DISP 2 268 REF SETUP 5 098 PROC DISP 3 269 FEATR SEL 1 122 PROC DISP 4 270 FEATR SEL 2 123 PROC DISP 5 271 FEATR SEL 3 124 FIELD 1 285 FEATR SEL 4 125 FIELD 2 286 FEATR SEL 5 126 FIELD 3 287 IN CFG 1 082 FIELD 4 288 IN CFG 2 083 FIELD 5 289 IN CFG 3 095 PROC PI 2 305 IN CFG 4 096 PROC PI 3 306 IN CFG 5 097 PROC PI 4 307 OUT CFG 1 098 PROC PI 5 308 OUT CFG 3 123 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Introduction Required Equipment Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Chapter 6 provides a guide to help you troubleshoot the 1397 Drive Included is a listin
254. ses a motor brush wear alarm 0 ALARM The Drive can still operate under this condition This input CANNOT be masked MOTOR THERMOSTAT Level sensitive input that causes a motor thermostat fault 0 FAULT The Drive will be faulted while this input is true This input CANNOT be masked POWER A 24VDC supply is available at this pin COMMON A 24VDC common supply is available at this pin 18 ANALOG REFERENCE 2 Fixed 10VDC analog reference ANALOG REFERENCE 1 Signal type selected by Anlg In 1 Type P 128 parameter 0 10 VDC 10 VDC 4 20mA 10 50mA and hardware jumpers on the regulator board J10 and J12 TB 21 22 23 ANALOG TACHOMETER IN Use of 21 or 22 is A determined by J14 hardware jumper on the regulator ATTENTION If motor rotation is changed by reversing either the motor armature lead connections or the field connections the Pulse Encoder feedback polarity on the B and NOT B leads must be reversed If a DC Tach is used feedback polarity must also be reversed Failure to observe this precaution could result in personal injury or damage to equipment 1 Wiring the Coast Stop Circuit The 1397 Drive has the capability to accept an input from either a 24VDC or 115VAC contact If the 115 VAC Control Option Board is installed The contact must be normally closed and will typically be a Stop pushbutton Refer to the following paragraphs for connection information This input cannot be masked and is always
255. set pg 5 71 198 CPU Loading pg 5 71 200 SCANport Errors pg 5 71 201 Start Mask pg 5 72 202 Direction Mask pg 5 72 203 Jog Mask pg 5 72 204 Reference Mask pg 5 73 205 Fault Reset Mask pg 5 73 206 MOP Mask pg 5 73 207 Logic Mask pg 5 74 208 Local Mask pg 5 74 214 Stop Owner pg 5 75 215 Run Owner pg 5 75 216 Direction Owner pg 5 75 217 Jog Owner pg 5 76 228 Reference Owner pg 5 76 219 Fit Reset Owner pg 5 77 220 MOP Owner pg 5 77 221 Local Owner pg 5 77 Adapter 1 0 226 Data In A1 pg 5 78 227 Data In A2 pg 5 78 228 Data In B1 pg 5 78 229 Data In B2 pg 5 78 230 Data In C1 pg 5 79 231 Data In C2 pg 5 79 232 Data In D1 pg 5 79 233 Data In D2 pg 5 79 234 Data Out A1 pg 5 80 235 Data Out A2 pg 5 80 236 Data Out B1 pg 5 80 237 Data Out B2 pg 5 80 238 Data Out C1 pg 5 81 p 239 Data Out C2 pg 5 81 240 Data Out D1 pg 5 81 241 Data Out D2 pg 5 81 Process Display 247 Process 1 Par pg 5 82 248 Process 1 Scale pg 5 82 249 Process 1 Text 1 pg 5 82 250 Process 1 Text 2 pg 5 82 251 Process 1 Text 3 pg 5 83 252 Process 1 Text 4 pg 5 83 253 Process 1 Text 5 pg 5 83 254 Process 1 Text 6 pg 5 83 255 Process 1 Text 7 pg 5 84 256 Process 1 Text 8 pg 5 84 257 Process 2 Par pg 5 84 258 Process 2 Scale pg 5 84 259 Process 2 Text 1 pg 5 85 260 Process 2 Text 2 pg 5 85 261 Process
256. set all parameters to correct values 088 Fault Log Error The fault log information stored in retentive memory was determined to be invalid the fault log has been cleared Possible causes include e Power loss occurred during a prior fault log save Check regulator board and replace if e Regulator Board malfunction necessary 089 Invalid Field The installed field supply is not supported by the regulator possibly due to e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged field Check the field supply wiring the supply wires regulated field suppy and the regulator e Regulated field supply malfunction board Repair or replace as e Regulator board malfunction necessary 090 Fld Fdbk Offset Regulated field supply feedback offset is too high possibly due to e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged field Check the field supply wiring the supply wires regulated field suppy and the regulator e Regulated field supply malfunction board Repair or replace as e Regulator board malfunction necessary 091 uP HW SW Fault e Regulator microprocessor malfunction e Electrical noise due to improper wiring practices or unsuppressed brake coils relays or contactors e Disconnected loosely connected or damaged Microbus ribbon cable Check regulator board and replace if e Malfunctioning regulator board necessary 100 599 Microbus Fault An error occurred on the Microbus possibly due to e Electrical noise due to improper wiring practices or Chec
257. sonnel A familiar with the construction and operation of this equipment and the hazards involved should install adjust operate and or service this equipment Read and understand this section in its entirety before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION An incorrectly installed or applied drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in damage to the Drive or motor ATTENTION This drive contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference Allen Bradley Publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 1 2 Introduction Chapter Objective Storage Conditions Drive Identification Nameplate Firmware Version Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Chapter 1 in addition to detailing drive features and specifications also supplies the information needed to unpack properly inspect and if necessary store the 1397 Drive A complete explanation of the ca
258. t Clear Queue will also clear active warning conditions Control Status Warning Queue Warning Queue View Warnings Brush Wear Low W 01 al Sustained Speed W 2 w N Warning Queue Clear Queue Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 3 14 Programming Terminal This Page Intentionally Blank Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Introduction Chapter 4 Start Up and Adjustment This chapter is a detailed step by step procedure for the proper start up and tuning of the 1397 drive Among the procedures to be performed in this chapter are the following e Verify Wiring e Verify proper supply voltages e Calibrate drive set up parameters e Set jumper switches e Execute drive tuning procedures The Start Up checklist should be used to record all data ATTENTION Servicing energized industrial control A equipment can be hazardous Severe injury or death can result from electrical shock burn or unintended actuation of controlled equipment Hazardous voltages may exist in the cabinet even with the circuit breaker in the off position Recommended practice is to disconnect and lock out control equipment from power sources and discharge stored energy in capacitors 1f present If it is necessary to work in the vicinity of energized equipment the Safety Related Practices of NFPA 70E ELECTRICAL SAFETY FOR EMPLOYEE WORKPLACES must be followed DO NOT work alone on energized equipment from improper useag
259. t Alarm Wiring a 10 qe 10 Fault Alarm Reset O Fault Alarm Reset 1 1 24VDC 115VAC Regulator Board Terminal Strip 115VAC Option Board CON 2 24VDC Fault Alarm Reset Circuit 115VAC Fault Alarm Reset Circuit Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 38 Installation 5 Wiring the Control I O Circuits Both the 24VDC and 115VAC control circuits use the 1 thru 6 terminals on their respective terminal strips for control functions as shown in Figure 2 28 Figure 2 28 Control I O Wiring 24V 115V L1 RUN RUN IN1 STOP STOP IN2 JOG JOG IN3 REV FWD REV FWD IN4 REF SELECT REFERENCE SELECT IN5 Regulator Board Terminal Strip 115VAC Option Board CON 2 24VDC Control I O Connections 115VAC Control I O Connections The RUN connection is made at terminal 2 on both 24VDC and 115VAC terminal strips The Run input is latched and therefore does not have to be maintained to keep the Drive Running This input can be masked through the Run Mask P 201 or Logic Mask P 207 parameter The STOP connection is made at terminal 3 on both 24VDC and 115VAC terminal strips The stopping mode is determined by the Stop Mode Type P 115 This input CANNOT BE MASKED alternative stopping method DO NOT use a hardwired Stop device that removes AC line power This will de energize the shunt field causing a loss of the DB effect and the motor will coast to a stop Hazards to personnel may exist if the machine is allowed to coast
260. t Decrement keys will scroll the display to a second profile Gf available C Once the desired profile name is dis played press the Enter key An informa tional display will be shown indicating the version numbers of the profile and drive D Press Enter to start the download The parameter number currently being downloaded will be displayed on line 1 of the HIM Line 2 will indicate total progress Press ESC to stop the download E A successful download will be indicated by Completed displayed on line 2 of the HIM Press Enter If ERROR is displayed see Chapter 6 NOTE After downloading the parameter profile the data is NOT automatically saved Perform a Save to save parameters to non volatile memory EEprom HIM gt Drive HIM gt Drive 1A Master Type 2 01 2 03 HIM Drive 60 Drive HIM 210 Completed Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Programming Terminal 3 11 Save Values ESC E fl 1 To save values in the EEProm Mode A Use the ESCape key if necessary to reach the Choose Mode display B Press the Increment or Decrement key until EEProm is displayed C Press Enter D Press the Increment or Decrement key until Save Values displayed E Press Enter to save values Choose Mode Display Choose Mode EEProm EEProm Save Values Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 3 12 Programming Terminal Search Mode
261. talog numbering system is also included in this chapter After receipt inspection repack the Drive in its original shipping container until ready for installation To ensure satisfactory operation at startup and to maintain warranty coverage store the Drive as follows e In its original shipping container in a clean dry safe place e In an ambient temperature that does not exceed 65 C 149 F or go below 30 C 22 F e Within a relative humidity range of 5 to 95 without condensation e At an altitude of less than 3 000 meters 10 000 ft above sea level The 1397 DC Drive has a nameplate on the side of the chassis Fig 1 1 that identifies the specific model number design applicable AC input power and DC output power data All communication concerning this product should refer to the appropriate model number information Figure 1 1 Bulletin 1397 Nameplate XA ALLEN BRADLEY IZ A ROCKWELL INTERNATIONAL COMPANY BULLETIN 1397 M N 1397 BO10R 5 10HP INPUT 230 460VAC 19A 3PH 50 60HZ OUTPUT 240 500VDC 20A DC FIELD 150 300VDC 10A SHORT CIRCUIT RATING 5000A UM 1397 5 0 W D 30371 23 FOR 230V OPERATION SEE l M SERIAL NO 1397 B010R V 001 WY MADE IN USA The technical power information on the nameplate should be referenced to verify proper power application The manual covers firmware versions through 2 xx Introduction 1 3 Catalog Numbering Drive specific data such as horsepower or output current C
262. tening torque in the table app d When an input or an output device breaker or lug kit is added refer to the kit ons for tightening specifications provide instructi ies to the wiring device stud or terminal board Installation 2 25 Recommended AC Line and DC Armature Fuses The following tables list the recommended AC line and DC armature fuses for the Drive The armature fuse is required only for regenerative Drives Standard models are shipped with the appropriate fuses You must select the correct replacement fuse type from Tables 2 E and 2 F Table 2 E AC Line Fuses AC Line Fuse 1FU 2FU 3FU HP at230VAC HPat380VAC HPat415VAC HPat460VAC Fuse Rating 500 V Fuse Class Manufacturer 1 5 5 2 4 2 8 3 10 40A XL50F Bussman 7 5 10 12 13 8 15 20 80A XL50F Bussman 15 24 27 6 30 90A XL50F Bussman 20 30 48 55 2 40 60 150A XL50F Bussman 40 60 120 138 75 125 300A XL50F Bussman 75 150 350A XL50F Bussman 100 200 600A XL50F Bussman 125 150 250 300 800A XL50F Bussman 400 600 600A 700V A70QS600 4K Gould 2 in parallel Table 2 F DC Armature Fuses Regenerative Drives Only DC Line Fuse 11FU HP at 230 VAC A 380 415 VAC HP at 460 VAC Fuse Rating 700 V Fuse Class Manufacturer 1 5 7 3 15A XL70F Bussman 2 7 4 20A XL70F Bussman 3 7 6 25A XL70F Bussman 5 7 10 35A XL70F Bussman TO 29 15 40A XL70F Bussman 10 29 20 50A XL70F Bussman 15 55 30 70A XL70F Bussman 20 25 55 4
263. ter 2 6 Adapter 3 7 Adapter 4 8 Adapter 5 9 Adapter 6 Register Configurable Advanced Setup 0 0 9 Note Default is zero for non regenerative drives if Feedback Type is set to AC Tach or if Feedback Type is set to Encoder and Encoder Quad is off Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 32 Programming Parameters ADV SETUP PLL Max Error P 071 Maximum allowable change in line period per AC line cycle This input should only be increased when drive power is supplied by a source that cannot maintain a suitable fixed frequency output such as an alternator to prevent line synchronization related faults Spd LeadLag Freq P 072 If Lead Lag is selected in Spd Leadlag Type this parameter represents the low lead frequency If Spd Leadlag Type is set to Bypass this parameter has no effect If Lag Lead is selected it represents the low lag frequency Spd LeadLag Rato P 073 Sets the ratio of low to high break frequencies for the lead lag block For example if this parameter is set to 10 the high break frequency will be 10 times the low break frequency specified by Spd Leadlag Freq If Spd Leadlag Type is set to Bypass this parameter has no effect Spd LeadLag Type P 074 Determines if the lead lag block will act upon the speed loop feedback signal If On the lead lag block is bypassed and the feedback signal is used directly by the speed loop summing junction
264. ternal 24 V DC power supply or from an external 24 V DC power source The internal 24 V DC power supply is available at the regulator board terminal strip see Fig 2 15 If an external power source is used only its common must be connected to 24VCOM on the regulator board terminal 15 Electrical Specifications Input Voltage 24 VDC Turn On Voltage 8 VDC Turn Off Current 0 5 mA Common All input circuits have the same common The logic output circuits are normally open when de energized relay contacts When energized contacts closed the three circuits indicate the following drive conditions Terminals are on the terminal strip on the regulator board Running Terminal 27 to 28 Alarm Terminal 29 to 30 No Fault Terminal 31 to 32 Electrical Specifications Operating Voltage 250 VAC maximum 30 VDC maximum Switching Current 2 Amps maximum resistive 1 Amp maximum inductive Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 1 8 Introduction Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 The three customer analog inputs are Analog Reference 1 Analog Reference 2 and Analog Tachometer Feedback These inputs are converted within the Drive to 12 bits plus sign at their full range The electrical specifications for each of these are listed below Analog Reference 1 Terminals 19 20 see page 4 25 for J10 amp J12 jumper settings Voltage Reference 10 VDC Milliamp Reference 4 20 mA or 10 50 mA Analog Re
265. the selected signal is at its full scale value Signal Selected Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Full Scale Value Numeric Text 0 Cur Lp Fdbk 1 Cur Loop Ref 2 Cur Loop Err 3 Spd Loop Fdbk 4 Spd Lp Ref 5 Spd Lp Error 6 Spd Lp Out 7 Spd Ramp Out 8 Spd Ramp In 9 Spd Src Out 10 Trim Output Configurable Output Config 14 Zero 0 22 11 Arm Volt 12 ATach Fdbk 13 Encoder Fdbk 14 Zero 15 Full Scale 16 Power Output 17 OCL Ref 18 OCL Ramp Out 19 OCL Feedback 20 OCL Output 21 Field Ref 22 Field Fdbk Cur Loop Fdbk P 006 Cur Loop Ref P 008 Cur Loop Error P 007 Spd Loop Output P 024 Motor Arm Amps x Maximum Current 100 Spd Loop Fdbk P 022 Spd Loop Ref P 025 Spd Loop Error P 021 Spd Ramp Output P 028 Spd Ramp Input Tp P 027 Spd Sc Output P 026 Trim Output P 030 Analog Tach Fdbk P 194 Encoder Fdbk P 189 OCL Output P 018 Top Speed Armature Voltage P 005 Motor Arm Volts Power Output Motor Arm Volts x Motor Arm Amps x Maximum Current Fld Reference P 280 Motor Field Amps Field Feedback P 010 OCL Reference TP P 020 4095 OCL Ramp Output P 019 OCL Feedback P 017 Full Scale Zero 0 Publication 1397 5 0 June 20
266. tion Reference AutoTune Bridge P 112 Selects the desired direction for auto tuning to operate Display Drive Units Parameter Type Tunable Group Feature Select Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 50 Rounding 0 Rounding 50 90 90 Ramp Time Ramp Time Display Drive Units Numeric Text Parameter Type Configurable Group Feature Select Factory Default 0 Forward Minimum Value 0 Forward Maximum Value 1 Reverse Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 44 Programming Parameters FEATURE SELECT AutoTune Fld Rng P 113 Set to the ratio of Max Motor Speed and motor base speed 1 00 when no field weakening is used Applies to speed loop autotuning only The higher the value the faster the motor speed AutoTune Stablty P 114 Selects the desired performance of the speed loop after auto tuning A higher value decreases the speed loop s response Stop Mode Type P 115 Selects stopping mode of the drive in response to a Stop command An open customer interlock only causes a coast stop If the drive is configured as a current regulator only Coast DB can be selected Stop Speed Level P 116 Sets the threshold speed below which the main contactor will automatically open after a ramp stop or current limit stop is asserted This value should be less than or equal to Min Process Speed Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Displa
267. to a stop 1 ATTENTION If Dynamic Braking is used as an determine which stopping method is best suited to the application and will meet applicable standards for operator safety ATTENTION You have the ultimate responsibility to Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Installation 2 39 The JOG connection is made at terminal 4 on both 24VDC and 115VAC terminal strips The Drive will jog when this input is asserted if the Drive is Ready and not already Running This input can be masked through the Jog Mask P 203 or Logic Mask P 207 The DIRECTION connection is made at terminal 5 on both 24VDC and 115VAC terminal strips This level sensitive input selects between Forward 0 and Reverse 1 This parameter can be masked through the Direction Mask P 202 or Logic Mask P 207 parameters The REFERENCE SELECT connection is made at terminal 6 on both 24VDC and 115VAC terminal strips This level sensitive input selects between ANALOG REFERENCE 1 1 and ANALOG REFERENCE 2 0 parameters to be used as the reference to the Drive This parameter can be masked through the Reference Mask P 204 or Logic Mask P 207 parameters NOTE If an VO expansion board is installed the Preset Speed selection bits will override the reference selected by this input 6 Wiring the Analog Input Circuits Terminals TB16 thru TB23 as shown in Figure 2 29 are used for reference and feedback signals ANALOG REFERENCE 2 is a
268. to tuning will tune the Drive speed regulator based on values contained in the following parameters Auto Tune Bridge P 112 Determines which bridge will be used during the auto tune process If this parameter is set to Reverse the reverse bridge is used and the motor runs in the reverse direction during the auto tune process For non regenerative Drives this is automatically set to Forward and cannot be changed For most applications satisfactory results are obtained when Auto Tune Bridge is set to forward Auto Tune Fld Rng P 113 Scales the auto tune results based on the speed range that the Drive will operate when running the process The value of this parameter is the ratio of Max Motor Speed to the motor s base speed For example if the motor base speed is 1750 RPM and Max Motor Speed is 2100 RPM Auto Tune Fld Rng should be set to 1 2 i e 2100 RPM 1750 RPM 1 2 For applications where the motor runs less than 10 above base speed satisfactory results are obtained when Auto Tune Fld Rng is set to a default of 1 00 Auto Tune Stablty P 114 Provides a simple means for the user to adjust the performance of the speed loop without adjusting the individual gains The default value of 25 produces a speed loop response which is satisfactory for most applications If the user desires a faster response a value less than 25 may be used If the user desires a slower speed loop response i e more sta
269. trial operator devices such as pushbuttons switches and meters can be used Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 B 4 CE Conformity Mounting the Equipment Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 254mm 10 in Mount all electronic and electromagnetic components including the Drive and the line filter firmly to the base mounting panel The mounting panel must have good conductivity as described in the paragraph Selecting a Mounting Panel and Electrical Cabinet Mounting the Drive If the cabinet includes ventilation louvers or filter and fan openings in the sides or door the openings cannot be located within a zone 254 mm 10 inches above and below the height of the Drive as shown in Figure B 1 Figure B 1 Prohibited Area for Cabinet Ventilation Openings KTX SS SS SS Ss SIN Allen Bradley No cabinet openings in the doors or sides are permitted in the shaded area Mounting the AC Line Filter Refer to Figures B 2 and B 3 for filter mounting dimensions The filter can be mounted either flat with its back against the panel or on its side with either side against the panel If the 3DF4359 is mounted on its side it must be mounted on the L bracket included with the filter Mount the 3DF4359 in the L bracket first then mount the L bracket using 12mm screws Figure B 2 Filter Dimensions CE Conformity B 5 F
270. ture Voltage 500 V DC Field Voltage w basic fld supply 300 V DC Service Factor Ratings Service Factor 1 0 Continuous Overload Capacity drive only 150 of full load rating for one minute 200 of full load rating for 13 seconds Minimum Load 596 of rated load Service Conditions Ambient Temperature Chassis Cabinet Altitude Chassis and Cabinet Above 3300 feet Humidity Chassis and Cabinet Environment Regulation Tachometer Speed Regulation Introduction 55 C 131 F maximum 40 C 104 F maximum 3300 feet above sea level Derate 3 for every 1000 ft above 3300 ft up to 10000 ft 5 to 95 non condensing The drive should be located in an area that is free of dust dirt acidic or caustic vapors vibration and shock temperature extremes and electrical or electromagnetic noise interference Drive Efficiency Drive Only Drive and Motor Speed Change Speed Change with 95 Load from All other Regulation Arrangement Change Variables Kit Model Number Armature voltage regulation w IR 2 3 15 Standard Compensation Closed Loop DC Tach Feedback 1 2 Standard Pulse Encoder Feedback RD 120 Pulse Encoder FDBK 0 01 0 01 1397 PE 1 Optional pulse encoder feedback kit required Speed Change Operator s Speed Adjustment O to rated speed Specification Speed Range 100 1 based on top speed and tachometer 98 6 rated load and speed 85 typical Note Typical pe
271. ual trace oscilliscope with A minus B quasi differential capability e X100 probes for oscilliscope ATTENTION Do Not use a megohmmeter for AN continuity checks in the Drive The high voltage of the megohmmeter can damage the Drive s electronic circuits Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of equipment Only qualified electrical technicians and or electrical engineers familiar with solid state controls and circuitry should attempt a 1397 start up It is imperative that personnel familiarize themselves with the functional description portion of this manual The Drive employs regulator construction and uses a keypad for Drive setup including parameter adjustments and unit selection monitoring and diagnostics Reference feedback and metering signals can be interfaced to the Drive The Drive can be controlled locally by the Human Interface Module HIM keypad or remotely by using the terminals at the regulator board terminal strip Start Up and Adjustment 4 3 Drive Hardware Control Transformer Settings Adjustments Figure 4 1 Control TransformerTap Settings 100 150 HP 230 VAC 200 300 HP 460 VAC BOTTOM VIEW 183 182 H3 H1 H4 H2 TAP SETTINGS FOR TAP SETTINGS FOR 460 VAC INPUT POWER 230 VAC INPUT POWER H4 mm Hl Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 4 4 Start Up and Adjustment Figure 4 2 Control TransformerTap Settings 400 600 HP 460 VAC Secondary 115V Conv
272. ue Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read Only Owners 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read Only Owners 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 Numeric Text Bit Enum Text 0 Terminal Block 1 Adapter 1 2 Adapter 2 3 Adapter 3 4 Adapter 4 5 Adapter 5 6 Adapter 6 Read Only Owners 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000001111111 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 78 Programming Parameters Adapter 1 0 Data In A1 P 226 This parameter displays the parameter number to which PLC output data table information will be directly written during PLC operation Data In A2 P 227 This parameter displays the parameter number to which PLC output data table information will be directly written during PLC operation Data In B1 P 228 This parameter displays the parameter number to which PLC output data table information will be directly written dur
273. ueue and clear 1t when desired y F From the Control Status menu press the or Control Status Increment or Decrement key until Fault Queue Fault Queue is displayed m G Press Enter re or pa H Press the Increment or Decrement key SS Fault Queue until View Faults is displayed I Press Enter The fault queue will be displayed Trip displayed with a fault CAN Comm Lost will indicate the fault that tripped the S E drive m or L J Use the Increment or Decrement key n Motor Over Temp to scroll through the list F 07 2 En PS 2p m K To clear the fault queue press ESCape Fault Queue Then use the Increment Decrement keys to select Clear Queue Press Enter E Please note that Clear Queue will also clear active fault conditions Warning Queue Clear Warning 3 This menu provides a means to view the MM MM Warning queue and clear it when desired L From the Control Status menu press the Increment or Decrement key until Warning Queue is displayed M Press Enter N Press the Increment or Decrement key until View Warnings is displayed O Press Enter The Warning queue will be displayed Trip displayed with a fault will indicate the fault that tripped the drive P Use the Increment or Decrement key to scroll through the list Q To clear the Warning queue press ESCape Then use the Inc Dec keys to select Clear Queue Press Enter Please note tha
274. ulator board terminal strip are jumpered Figure 4 11 and proceed to Step 6 Figure 4 11 No Thermostat Option e BRUSH WEAR 13 Jumper here for 2 MOTOR THERMOSTAT non thermostat use 2 O m Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Regulator Board Terminal Strip 24VDC Thermostat Circuit motor thermostat be used to protect the motor from overheating Failure to use a thermostat or wire it properly could result in motor failure if the motor is run at excessive load for prolonged periods ATTENTION It is strongly recommended that a Temporarily remove the wire terminated at thermostat input terminal 14 of the regulator board terminal strip With an ohm meter measure the resistance between terminal 13 and the lead removed from terminal 14 If the measured resistance isn t between 0 and 2 ohms verify the motor thermostat wiring at the motor At the motor temporarily remove one of the motor thermostat connections and perform the resistance measurement performed above If a very high resistance is not measured i e infinity OL etc verify the motor thermostat wiring If resistance measurements are correct reconnect the thermostat wiring at both the Motor and Drive Brush Wear Input Some DC Motors are equipped with a brush wear switch which is designed to open when the carbon brushes become excessively worn The brush wear switch is an alarm signal indicating brush wear maintenance is required Motor and Feedback
275. um Value Display Drive Units Group Type Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value AMPS N A Diagnostics 0 0 1 15 Based on field regulator installed ENUM Diagnostics Not Installed 4 Amp 10 Amp 20 Amp n a Not Installed 20 Amp Numeric Text 0 Not Installed 1 Installed 2 Failed Diags 3 Failed Diags Diagnostics 0 Not Installed 0 Not Installed 3 Failed Diagnostics VOLT Diagnostics Output 0 0 338 0 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 66 Programming Parameters DIAGNOSTICS 411 Tach V Scale P 180 Position in which to set J11 hardware jumper based on the values of Max Motor Speed and Anlg Tach V 1000 This is a READ ONLY parameter Set Jumper J11 to the drive determined value that is displayed J14 Tach V Range P 181 Position in which to set J14 hardware jumper based on the values of Top Speed and Analog Tach V 1000 This is a READ ONLY parameter Set Jumper J14 to the drive determined value that is displayed 415 Reg Type P 182 Indicates the position of hardware jumper J15 Regulator Type which selects the type of regulator Speed Voltage or Current Torque This jumper is only read at power up J18 Arm Fdbk Res P 183 Indicates the required burden resistor position to scale armature current feedback based on the values of CT Turns Ratio Maximum Current and Motor Arm Amps Publication 1397 5 0 June
276. une 2001 Installation 2 23 Figure 2 16 A C Line Connection Locations 400 600 HP at 460 VAC AC LINE CONNECTION mm O W Do W bm W mal a j a 8 a f o o i is O O a o o H AC LINE a CONNECTION lo o o o o lo 180 182 e Q Q oo o o d loo Leg oo eg dog oo loo o ol o cho o lo eile le eee EN l ue ou GFU l l iFU 2FU 3FU ma l TAL TX FAL laa TI Ol s TOL i eielo fel 6 ji 81 61 18 of Ge ee te ET Es E o 281 282 283 ol 281 282 283 2 m np 0 E o 0 Bm DoD oli U of MA 0 AEN 0 0 a BLOWER MOTOR p BLOWER MOTOR pa O STARTERKITS OQ C O sTARTERKITS OO a a R 7 Li 2 n n n n n m Without AC With AC Line Disconnect Line Disconnect Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 2 24 Installation Table 2 D AC Line Connectors HP 1 5 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 Recommended Tightening Torque 230 VAC 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 Ib in 6 2 Nm 55 bin 6 2 Nm
277. une 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Tunable Advanced Setup 1 000 0 750 1 250 A ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause an overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person who understands the significance of setting it Set the value of this parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Tunable Advanced Setup 0 200 200 overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause an who understands the significance of setting it Set the value of this parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Tunable Advanced Setup 1 000 0 750 1 250 overspeed condition This parameter must be set by a qualified person who understands the significance of setting it Set the value of this ATTENTION The incorrect setting of this parameter can cause an parameter accurately per your application requirements Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Program
278. une 2001 Firmware Block Diagrams Figure A 10 Field Control Loop Fld Loop KP Fld LP Lead Freq P 279 P 278 Field Ref TP Field Delta P 176 KP WLD P 174 Q Y PI GAIN MUL Fld Delta HI Lim P 276 Fld Loop K Fdbk P 281 Gi ENABLED L gt KP WD DISABLED O Fld Weak Lead Freq P 282 Fld Weaken KP P 283 FIELD PHASE FIRING LOGIC Fid Auto Weaken P 275 See Note 1 NOTE 1 FIELD AUTO WEAK is clamped to DISABLED when FEEDBACK TYPE ARM VOLT FIELD REGILATOR SUPPLY Analog Metering Outputs n 1 2 From Current Minor Loop Block Diagram From Speed Loop Block Diagram From Speed Ref Select Block Diagram From Speed Ref Ramp Block Diagram From Speed Loop Block Diagram 4095 From Engineering Units Outputs Block Diagram From Outer Control Loop Block Diagram From Field Control Loop Block Diagram l ENCODER FDBK POWER OUTPUT CUR LP FDBK CUR LOOP REF CUR LOOP ERR SPD LP FDBK SPD LP REF SPD LP ERROR SPD LOOP OUT SPD RAMP OUT SPD RAMP IN SPD SRC OUT TRIM OUTPUT ARM VOLT ATACH FDBK ZERO FULL SCALE OCL REF OCL RAMP OUT OCL FEEDBACK OCL OUTPUT FIELD REF FIELD FDBK Figure A 11 Standard Outputs ANLGOUT1 ANLG OUT 1 GAIN ZERO ANLG OUT 1 SRC O AVG SOFTWARE TIME SCALING 100 ms ANLG OUT2 ANLG OUT 2 GAIN ZERO ANLG OUT 2 SRC O AVG SOFTWARE TIME SCALING 100 ms Default Selection D A D A A 11 Firmware Bl
279. unted Refer to Figure 2 thru 5 for the correct pattern 2 Insert but DO NOT fully tighten three bolts in the top holes of the panel Bolts must be fully threaded into the panel before hanging the Drive as shown in Figure 1 Figure E 1 Mounting Bolt Engagement 3 4 Max Projection One Full Thread Engagement Beyond Panel Required Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 E 2 Lifting Instructions Figure E 2 Mounting Hole Pattern 60 HP Drives Y 477 3 18 79 463 0 18 23 A 112 4 4 43 22 4 0 88 224 9 8 86 270 5 10 65 Figure E 3 Mounting Hole Pattern 150 HP Drives a 0 50 O GO g 490 0 19 29 1 464 6 18 29 i l e AE A fl f f 35 0 1 38 200 0 7 87 175 0 6 89 460 0 18 11 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 E 3 Lifting Instructions 599 0 Mounting Hole Pattern 300 HP Drives Figure E 4 eg EN age a FE JA ISI a TP s es 32 ga 28 E sa E 3 P E d ne ERG Se 32 850 0 83 46 Figure E 5 Mounting Hole Pattern 600 HP Drives 261 6 mm 10 30 671 6 mm 26 44 259 1mm 10 20 50 8 mm 2 00 15 0 mm 0 59 1 1076 3 mm 42 37 1104 0 m
280. ust be secured at both ends in a solid connection Poor termination of a ground connection is the single biggest source of EMC problems For connections use fittings intended for solid long term connections to a grounded surface or continue the screen or conduit beyond the cabinet barrier to a ground terminal or copper bar extension Fittings should be rust resistant It 1s preferred to terminate the screen or conductive conduit to a system ground copper bar internal on the back of the panel and not rely on the conduit fitting to maintain the ground circuit Shielded cable should use a drain wire for the electrical bonding of the shield to the ground system Wiring guidelines are provided here for wiring that is external and internal to the electrical cabinet and also for specific components External Wiring Guidelines External control signal and power wiring must be in shielded cable or rigid continuous conductive conduit If the system includes a remote operator station that is connected to the 1397 Drive the operator station wiring must be in rigid continuous conductive conduit Shielded cable cannot be used for the operator station NOTE Many flexible metal conduit products have not been designed for RF containment and are not adequate to maintain compliance CE Conformity B 11 Internal Wiring Guidelines All cables and wires must be run as closely to the panel as possible AC DC and control wires should be stacked and
281. ustomer Interlock Circuit 3 Wiring the Motor Thermostat Brush Wear Circuits Either a 24VDC or 115VAC input can be used to receive an external voltage for a normally closed contact used in a motor thermostat circuit As shown in Figure 2 26 Terminal 13 is used for the motor thermostat circuit on both 24VDC and 115VAC configurations If the motor thermostat circuit is open the Drive will display a fault and coast to a stop Terminal 12 is used for a level sensitive input that triggers a motor brush wear alarm The Drive will continue to operate under this condition Both the MOTOR BRUSH WEAR and MOTOR THERMOSTAT inputs are always active and CANNOT be masked Installation 2 37 Figure 2 26 Motor Thermostat Brush Wear Wiring BRUSH WEAR BRUSH WEAR MOTOR THERMOSTAT MOTOR THERMOSTAT 24V 115V HI Regulator Board Terminal Strip 115VAC Option Board CON 2 24VDC Thermostat Brush Wear Circuit 115VAC Thermostat Brush Wear Circuit The contacts of the motor thermostat and Brush Wear must be N C The Drive interprets a voltage at Terminals 12 amp 13 as a normal expected condition This input CANNOT be masked 4 Wiring the Fault Alarm Reset Circuit This input clears fault and or alarm indicators and resets the circuit As shown in Figure 2 27 the Fault Alarm Reset circuit requires a N O operator device that closes to cause a reset This input can be masked using the Fault Reset Mask P 205 or Logic Mask P 207 Figure 2 27 Faul
282. ward direction If device 1 1s commanding a start which is a multiple owner function other devices can also command a start If device 1 stops commanding the start the Drive does not stop running if another device is still commanding the start A rising edge is required for start and jog functions If a jog or start 1s still commanded after the Drive is stopped start and jog functions will not operate from any device until the jog or start commands are removed Start commands from SCANport devices are 3 wire maintained latched Determining Function Ownership To determine which device is issuing a specific command use parameters 214 through 221 File Program Display To determine which device Check this Group Owners is issuing this command Parameter Stop Owner Stop 214 Direction Owner Direction Owner 216 Run Owner Run 215 Jog Owner Jog 217 Reference Owner Speed reference 218 Fit Reset Owner Clear Fault 219 MOP Owner MOP 220 Local Owner Local 221 For each of these parameters each bit represents a device as detailed in the following table Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 D 4 Using SCANport Capabilities If this bit is set The owner is Terminal Block SCANport device 1 SCANport device 2 SCANport device 3 SCANport device 4 SCANport device 5 SCANport device 6 OO a p oO NOTE Bit 7 is not used in this application NOTE
283. y and the ability to supply 1397 5 24 240V field voltage and other special voltages This kit replaces the standard field supply Regulated Field Supply Provides field economy as well as pre weakening of the field using a 1397 5 17 Supplied as standard on fixed reference or field weakening for above base speed operation 400 600HP 460V Tachometer feedback is required with this kit This kit replaces the 150HP 460V standard field supply 75 HP 230V and up 265 amp 521 ADC 380 415 VAC Blower Motor Starter Provides a fused A C starter with adjustable overload and interlocking 1397 5 20 for control of three phase blower motor used to cool the DC motor Expansion I O Module Mounts on the 1397 chassis and gives the drive additional analog 1397 5 19 frequency and digital I O capability Pulse Encoder Interface Card Allows for digital pulse encoder speed feedback 1397 5 13 All Horsepowers AC Tachometer Interface Card Allows for AC tachometer speed feedback 1397 5 22 All Horsepowers AC Line Disconnect Allows the three phase line to be disconnected at the drive 1397 5 21 75 150 HP 460V 40 75 HP 230V AC Line Disconnect Allows the three phase line to be disconnected at the drive 1397 5 27 200 300 HP 460V 100 150 HP 230V 521 ADC 380 415 VAC Inverting Fault Circuit Breaker Allows high inertia loads on regenerative 1397 drives 1397 5 29 400 600 HP AC Line Disconnect Allows the three phase line to be disconnected at the drive
284. y Default Maximum Value Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Numeric Text Adapter I O Configurable 0 0 308 Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 82 Programming Parameters Process Display Process 1 Par P 247 This parameter should be set to the number of the parameter whose scaled value will be displayed on Line 1 of the HIM Display Panel Process 1 Scale P 248 This value sets the scaling multiplier for Process 1 Par Process 1 Text 1 P 249 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 1 Par and Process 1 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of the display Process 1 Text 2 P 250 Sets the User Units description for the value determined by Process 1 Par and Process 1 Scale The 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of the display Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Minimum Value Factory Default Maximum Value
285. y Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Display Drive Units Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Tunable Feature Select 1 00 0 90 5 00 Tunable Feature Select 25 10 100 Numeric Text 0 Ramp 1 Curr Limit 2 Coast DB Tunable Feature Select 2 Coast DB 0 2 RPM Tunable Feature Select 50 0 Max Process Spd Programming Parameters 5 45 FEATURE SELECT Trim Mode Type P 117 Selects the type of trim mode to be used by the drive e No Trim e Incremental e Proportional Allows multiple drive sections with a common reference to operate and ramp at different values Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 No Trim 1 Incremental 2 Proportional Tunable Feature Select 0 0 2 Proportional is a type of draw By using draw one section can operate 10 faster than an upstream section When a ramp occurs on the common reference the two sections will support the 10 draw throughout the ramp S Curve Rounding will interfere with the Accel Time and the Decel Time so that the draw will
286. y injury or loss of life If Normal Open is selected digital output 1 is open when the signal is off and closed when it is on If Normal Closed is selected digital output 1 is closed when the signal is off and open when it is on Publication 1397 5 0 June 2001 5 60 Programming Parameters OUTPUT CONFIG Dig Out 2 Src P 157 Only used if the I O Expansion Kit is installed Selects the signal used to drive digital output 2 terminals 68 and 69 on the I O Expansion board Dig Out 2 Type P 158 Only used if the I O Expansion Kit is installed Selects whether digital output 2 terminals 68 and 69 on I O Expansion board is normally open or normally closed Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Monitor Out 1 Monitor2 Out 2 In Cur Limit 3 Drive Ready Configurable Output Config 1 0 3 A ATTENTION This output is intended for use as an indication DO NOT use this as a control source If it is used as a control source a dangerous condition can result Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Display Drive Units Parameter Range Parameter Type Group Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value Numeric Text 0 Normal Open 1 Normal Closed Configurable Output Config 0 0 1 A ATTENTION On a power cyc

1397-UM000 - Rockwell Automation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents